Sei sulla pagina 1di 512

TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

VERSION 1.0
BASIC MEASUREMENT TRAINING WORKBOOK
FAROARMUSB
JANUARY 2008
INSTRUCTORS BOOK

CAM2
MEASURE
©FARO Technologies, Inc. 2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any means
without written permission of FARO Technologies Inc.

FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR


IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE
FARO ARM AND ITS MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE
SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS.

IN NO EVENT SHALL FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR


SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE FARO
ARM OR ITS MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO FARO
TECHNOLOGIES INC. REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT
EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of FARO Technologies Inc.

FaroArm® CAM2® SPC Graph® and SPC Process® are registered trademarks of FARO
Technologies Inc.

Windows® and Excel® are registered trademarks of Microsoft, Inc.

DATAPAGE® is a registered trademark of Brown & Sharpe, Inc.

Pro/ENGINEER® is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation.

CATIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes.

Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.

Rhinoceros® is a registered trademark of Robert McNeel & Associates

FARO Technologies Inc. Internal Control File Locations:


F:\CONTROL\REFERENC\08PRODUC\ENGLISH\Prdpub13\08m13e10 - FARO USB Arm Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Instructor - January 2008.pdf
F:\CONTROL\RECORDS\05MANUFA\PARTSPEC\XH17-0360.pdf
• Course Introduction:

• This course will explain DIRECT (Dimensional Inspection Reverse


Engineering and Control Tool) applications of the FaroArm.

• This course is designed to provide the basic skills necessary to measure a


part, check a part, and compare measurements to nominal CAD files.

• There will be lectures, as well as hands-on exercises that will allow the
student to practice the skills learned.
E

1
C P3 8 2 P4 D
9
10
F 7 3

A P1 4 P2
B
6
5

G
S1

S2
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

Course Checklist
Chapter 1: Hardware Overview
❑ FaroArm Control Station
❑ Setting up the FaroArm
❑ Connecting the Computer
❑ Referencing the Encoders
❑ FaroArm Handle Buttons
❑ FaroArm Errors
❑ Important Topics - Hardware Overview
Chapter 2: Hardware Overview Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
❑ Using this manual
❑ Starting CAM2 Measure X
❑ Screen Layout
❑ Graphics Field
❑ DRO Window
❑ Pull-down Menus
❑ Toolbar Buttons
❑ Output Control Bar
❑ Status Bar
❑ Control Bars
❑ CAM2 Measure X HELP
❑ About CAM2
❑ Hotkeys - Viewing
❑ Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)
❑ Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse)
❑ Hotkeys - Commands
❑ Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification
❑ Calibration and Certification
❑ What is Calibration?
❑ Certification
❑ Probe Calibration
❑ XYZ Location
❑ Probe Calibration Error
❑ Single Hole Method
❑ Auxiliary Switch
❑ Important Topics - Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification
i
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification


Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Probe Calibration
❑ Calibrate Probe
❑ Single Point Certification
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
❑ Types of Features
❑ 2D Features
❑ 3D Features
❑ Compensation
❑ Plane Compensation
❑ Compensation of a 2D Feature
❑ Review Features
❑ Printing
❑ Erasing
❑ Important Topics - Feature Measurement
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical
❑ Practical Exercises
❑ Execute Mode
❑ View Control
❑ Review Features
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
❑ Coordinate Systems
❑ What is a Coordinate System?
❑ Alignments
❑ Feature Reducibility
❑ Feature Reducibility Exercise
❑ Constructions
❑ What is a Construction?
❑ Common Constructions
❑ Dimensions
❑ What is a Dimension?
❑ Tricky Dimensions
❑ Important Topics - Basic Part Measurement
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Setting the Alignment
❑ Feature Measurements
❑ Constructions

ii
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Changing Labels from Review Features


❑ Dimensions
❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report
❑ Save The Measurements
❑ Additional Coordinate Systems
❑ Switching between coordinate systems.
❑ Save Again
Chapter 10: Checking a Part
❑ Nominals
❑ What is a Nominal?
❑ Types of Nominals
❑ CAD to Part Alignments
❑ CAD=Part
❑ Important Topics - Checking a Part
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Getting the Nominals
❑ Setting the Alignment
❑ Save The Measurements
❑ Measuring Features and Adding Nominals
❑ Adding a Nominal through Review Features
❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report
❑ Save Again
Chapter 12: Move Device Position
❑ Purpose
❑ Moving the Device
❑ Realign the Part to the Device
❑ Important Topics - Move Device Position
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Importing CAD File
❑ Setting the Coordinate System
❑ Save The Measurements
❑ Measure Features for the Move Device Position
❑ Performing the Move Device Position Command
❑ Add Measurements to an Existing Feature
Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks
❑ The Measurement Track
❑ Examine the Task
❑ Setup Considerations
❑ Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment

iii
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Data Collection
❑ Data Output
❑ Other Hints
Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD
❑ Why Work with CAD?
❑ CAD Terminology
❑ Types of CAD Data
❑ Standard CAD Data File Formats
❑ IGES
❑ 3DM
❑ VDA
❑ Measurement Template
❑ Iterative Alignment (Best Fit)
❑ Automatic Nominal Association
❑ Important Topics - Checking a Part With CAD
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Translating an IGES File
❑ Measuring the Alignment Features
❑ Setting an Iterative Alignment
❑ Save The Measurements
❑ Measure the Remaining Features
❑ Modifying On-Screen Labels
❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report
❑ Save Again
Chapter 17: Surface Measurement
❑ Why Measure a Surface?
❑ Surface Measurement Commands
❑ Inspect Surface
❑ Surface Edge Point
❑ Surface Point
❑ Home In Point
❑ Important Topics - Surface Measurement
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Translating and Adding the CAD data
❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment
❑ CAD=Part
❑ Save the Measurements
❑ Checking a Surface
❑ Checking an Edge

iv
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Using Home In Points


❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report
❑ Save Again
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment
❑ CAD=Part
❑ Scan Measurement Preference
❑ Parallel Lock Planes
❑ Show Surface Deviation
❑ Rescale Whiskers
❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report
Chapter 20: Point Measurement
❑ Point Measurements
❑ Comp Off and Comp Axis
❑ High Point and Low Point
❑ Surface Measurements
❑ Important Topics - Point Measurement
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
❑ PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement
❑ Measuring the Alignment Features
❑ Constructing the Alignment
❑ High Points
❑ Home-in Options
❑ Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K
❑ Three Coordinates, Select Surface
❑ Three Coordinates, Sample Surface
❑ Save the Home In File
❑ Measure the Home In Points
Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement
❑ Sheet Metal Measurements
❑ Simple Features
❑ Unique Sheet Metal Measurements
❑ Surface Points
❑ CAD Side and Other Side
❑ Dynamic Nominals
❑ Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture Measurement
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement
Practical
❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE
❑ Constructing Nominals

v
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Using the Measurement Template


❑ Iterative Alignment
❑ Compare to Straight Nominal Edge
❑ Compare Nominal Circles
❑ Compare Nominal Round Slots
❑ Compare Nominal Surfaces
Chapter 24: Round Tubing
❑ Tubing Part Preferences
❑ Measure Tube
❑ Round Tube
❑ Rectangular Tube
❑ Tube Fitting
❑ Construct Tube
❑ Enter XYZ
❑ Enter PTB
❑ From Features
❑ Breakpoints
❑ Importing Data
❑ Tube Reporting
❑ Tube Correction Report
❑ Important Topics - Round Tubing
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Measuring a Tube
❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute
Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Preparing the Learn Execute file
❑ Start Programming
❑ Constructing a Nominal Tube
❑ Construct Tube Points
❑ Measuring a Tube
❑ Tube Alignment
❑ Printing a Report
❑ End Learn.
Chapter 27: Tool Building
❑ Tool Building
❑ DRO Window
❑ Dynamic DRO Window
❑ Important Topics - Tool Building

vi
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical


❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Aligning to the CAD
❑ Iterative Alignment
❑ Import Model
❑ Creating a DRO window on a Nominal
❑ Positioning the Bracket
❑ Recording the Tool Position
Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions
❑ Geometric Characteristics and Symbols
❑ Form Dimensions
❑ Orientation Dimensions
❑ Parallelism
❑ Perpendicularity
❑ Concentricity
❑ True Position Dimensions
❑ RFS (Regardless of Feature Size)
❑ MMC (Maximum Material Condition)
❑ Important Topics - Advanced Dimensions
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Constructing Nominals
❑ Creating a Nominal Alignment
❑ Measure the Datum Features
❑ Constructing the Measured Alignment
❑ Position Dimensions
❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report
❑ Save The Measurements
Chapter 31: Introduction to Scanning
❑ What is Scanning?
❑ Why Scan?
❑ Scanning Options
❑ Freehand Scan
❑ Lock Planes
❑ Editing Scan data
❑ Important Topics - Introduction to Scanning
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment
❑ CAD=Part
❑ Save the Measurements
vii
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Scan Measurement Preference


❑ Freehand Scanning (2D)
❑ Parallel Lock Planes
Chapter 33: Measurement Automation
❑ Learn Mode
❑ On-Line Learn
❑ Off-Line Learn
❑ Execute Mode
❑ Important Topics - Measurement Automation
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation
Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Translating and Adding CAD
❑ Start Learning
❑ Measure Alignment/Datum Features
❑ Creating an Alignment
❑ Constructions and Dimensions
❑ Generating a Report
❑ End Learn.
❑ Execute Mode
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation
Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Translating and Adding CAD
❑ Start Learning
❑ Add Alignment/Datum Features
❑ Adding an Alignment
❑ Measuring Features
❑ Adding Constructions and Dimensions
❑ Generating a Report
❑ End Learn
❑ Execute Mode
Chapter 36: Measurement Automation
❑ Learn Mode
❑ Online or Offline?
❑ Execute Mode
❑ Display Results
❑ Important Topics - Measurement Automation
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
❑ Practical Exercise

viii
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Selecting Units and Default Tolerances


❑ Start Programming
❑ Constructing the Measured Alignment
❑ Printing a Report
❑ Modifying and Saving Your Learn file
❑ Execute Mode
Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s
Image Creator
❑ SoftCheck Tools
❑ Taking Pictures
❑ Image Creator
❑ The Green Ball
❑ 3D Effects
❑ Independent Comments
❑ Hot Keys for Image Creator
❑ Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s
Image Creator Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Taking and Importing Images
❑ Adding the Green/Red Balls
❑ Creating Images, Icons and Reports
❑ Saving the Image List
❑ Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure
❑ Execute the SoftCheck Tool
Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager
❑ Using the SoftCheck Tool Manager
❑ Navigating the SCTM
❑ Main Screen
❑ Tool List
❑ Administrator
❑ Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool Manager
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical
❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE
❑ Transferring SCTs to a New Computer
❑ SoftCheck Tool Setup
Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting
❑ Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph
❑ Using Pictures from a Digital Camera
❑ Chart Types

ix
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Advanced Chart Options


❑ Important Topics - Advanced Graphical Reporting
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
❑ Practical Exercise
❑ Modify the Learn/Execute Program
❑ Running the Learn Execute Program
❑ Creating a SPC Graph Template
❑ Align Icons
❑ Adding a Preview to the Program
Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems
❑ Feature Reducibility
❑ 3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems
❑ Coordinate Systems
❑ Change Coordinate System Discussion
❑ Important Topics - Intermediate Alignments
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
❑ PRACTICAL Exercise
❑ Measuring the Alignment Features
❑ Setting an Iterative Alignment
❑ 3-2-1
❑ Separate Origin
❑ Perpendicular Intersect
❑ Bore
❑ Line-Line
❑ Midpoint
❑ 3 Point
❑ 3 Plane
❑ Set Active Coordinate System
❑ Change Coordinate System
❑ Rotation
❑ Translation
Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System
❑ Calculated Coordinate System
❑ CAD=Part
❑ Constructions
❑ 2 Offset Line
❑ 3 Offset Plane
❑ Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate Systems
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE
❑ Nominal Alignments on the CAD

x
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

❑ Construct the Plane


❑ Construct the Plane
❑ Construct the Line
❑ Complete the Coordinate System
❑ Verify Alignment
Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments
❑ Feature Alignment
❑ Iterative Alignment with Surface Points
❑ Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values
❑ When to Use This Technique
❑ Watch Out!
❑ Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part Alignments
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments
Practical
❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment
❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Surface Points
❑ Using Surfaces as Nominals
❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values
❑ Measurement Template
❑ Using Surface Points

xi
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 January 2008

xii
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Hardware Overview


• Objective – The instructor will demonstrate all the
necessary cable connections and prepare the FaroArm for
measuring. After completing this exercise, the student will
know the proper mounting techniques to ensure accurate
measurements.

FaroArm Control Station


Listed below are a few of the common components for the FaroArm Control
Station systems:

❑ Surface Mount Plate


❑ 1 - 6 mm Ball Probe
❑ 1 - 3 mm Ball Probe
❑ FARO Calibration Cone
❑ Wrench
❑ USB Cable
❑ Power Supply with electrical cable
❑ FaroArm Accessories Manual
❑ CAM2 Measure X manual
❑ CAM2 Measure X Software CD
❑ CAM2 Measure X Port Lock - Required to run CAM2 Measure X
❑ Dust Cover - Use in dusty environments to protect the FaroArm
when not in use
❑ FaroArm Certification Document

Setting up the FaroArm


The FARO Control Station contains an instruction sheet for the unpacking and
setup of the tripod, computer, FaroArm, and printer.

It is very important that the FaroArm is mounted in a stable relationship to the


part (the part should not move relative to the FaroArm). When in doubt, a dial
indicator can be used to measure the deflection of the base of the FaroArm.
Poor accuracy is generally caused by poor mounting.

1
Chapter 1: Hardware Overview
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

1 Attach the 3.5 inch threaded ring and surface mount plate to any stable
location. A granite slab, or acceptably rigid surface, is recommended.
Tighten all mounting bolts to 11.5 N-m (100-inch pounds).

FIGURE 1-1 Mounting the Plate

2 Place the FaroArm on top of the 3.5 inch threaded ring.

3 Screw the threaded collar clamp onto the base of the FaroArm and the
3.5 inch threaded ring.

2
Chapter 1: Hardware Overview
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 Use the wrench to tighten the threaded collar clamp.

FIGURE 1-2 Mounting the FaroArm

Connecting the Computer


The host computer runs the CAM2 Measure X software in the Microsoft
Windows (2000, XP) environment.

The port lock plugs into the parallel (printer), or any USB port, and authorizes
CAM2 Measure X to operate.

The FaroArm output is accepted through any PC-compatible computer


USB port.

The FaroArm is then connected to the Power Supply cable.

On/Off
• I = On.
SWITCH
• O = Off.
USB
PORT

FIGURE 1-3 FaroArm cable connections

3
Chapter 1: Hardware Overview
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

For safety reasons, the power cord should be connected last.

NOTE: Complete all cable connections before applying power to the


computer and the FaroArm.

1 FaroArm.
2 Computer. 4 5
3 USB Cable.
4 FaroArm Power
Supply.
5 Power Outlet.

3
1 2

FIGURE 1-4 Connecting the Cables

Referencing the Encoders

Each of the six (or seven) encoders in the FaroArm must be referenced
before the system can output data. The end stop warning window shows all six
(or seven) encoders in error until each is referenced. In a systematic manner,
rotate links one through six (or seven) until each warning clears.

FIGURE 1-5 Referencing the encoders

NOTE: The FaroArm must be properly connected to the host computer


running the measuring software to see the reference dialog box

4
Chapter 1: Hardware Overview
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

FaroArm Handle Buttons


The FRONT button is used to collect data, and the BACK button to accept the
data.

• The FRONT button is green and nearest the probe.

• The BACK button is red and furthest from the probe.


The FaroArm has two sets of buttons, where the FRONT buttons and BACK
buttons are redundant and wired together internally. When a button is pressed,
the LED light turns on (red or green) and the Computer sounds.

BACK BUTTON
LED FRONT BUTTON

FIGURE 1-6 FaroArm Handle Buttons

FaroArm Errors
The FaroArm error codes are listed in the back of the FaroArm Manual. If an
error occurs, contact FARO Customer Support.

• Please have a written description of the error and what was done just
before the error occurred.

• Know the FaroArm Serial Number before calling. The Serial Number
is listed on the base of the FaroArm.

5
Chapter 1: Hardware Overview
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Hardware Overview


• The FaroArm should always feel fluid in its movement.

• If excessive force is needed to move to a measuring location, a degree


of freedom has probably been lost.

• The following figures illustrate some of the possible positions of a


FaroArm in which a degree of freedom has been lost.

FIGURE 1-7 Loss of a Degree of Freedom

• The 2 Sigma Single Point Accuracy Value is labeled on the FaroArm.


In general, no measurement with the FaroArm should exceed the 3
Sigma Linear Displacement Accuracy Value.

• Poor accuracy is generally caused by poor mounting.

• Connect the power cable last.

• The port lock plugs into the computers USB or parallel port and
enables CAM2 Measure X.

6
Chapter 1: Hardware Overview
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 2: Hardware Overview Instructors


Practical Comments

Practical Exercise
Practice the setup and packing of the FaroArm/CAM2 Measure X system, or
the FARO Control Station System.

7
Chapter 2: Hardware Overview Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Instructors


Measure X Comments

• Objective - The instructor will introduce the CAM2 Measure


Remember this
X user interface. After completing this section the students assumes that
will be able to customize the system and hardware settings. the
Using this manual Measurement
Device is
The practical sections of this manual include step by step instructions that
instruct you in every step of the process. For example, when we want you to
connected. Try
select a command, you will see the following text. to make sure
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT. that each
system is
You should use the mouse to select the command from the pull-down menu
bar. operating
properly before
class.

FIGURE 3-1 Selecting commands from the menu

2 ❑ After selecting any command, you will see messages in the Output
control bar at the bottom of the screen.

9
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Starting CAM2 Measure X


Select CAM2 Measure X from the Windows START button.

Select the units: inches, or millimeters. This creates a new file on the screen.

NOTE: The units cannot be switched during the measurement session.

The default Part Preferences automatically load, these set the decimal places,
tolerances, report formats, and other part related preferences. You can use
CAM2 Measure X without a measuring device. This is often called using
CAM2 Measure X off line.

Screen Layout

5
3

4
6

1 Graphics Field 2 Toolbar Buttons


3 Digital Read Out (DRO) 4 Output Bar
5 Pull Down menu 6 Status Bar
7 Control Bars
FIGURE 3-2 Screen Layout

NOTE: This figure above shows the default setup, but you customize the
screen layout by dragging the toolbars and control bars.

10
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Graphics Field
The major portion of the CAM2 Measure X screen is consumed by the
graphics field. This is the area that displays the measurements, and CAD data.

FIGURE 3-3 Graphics Field

DRO Window
The Digital Readout (DRO) Window displays the current coordinate
information from the measuring device. This window is located at the top of
the CAM2 Measure X window. You can move and size the window with the
mouse. Hide the window by pressing the D key on the computer keyboard.
Press the D key again to display the DRO Window. These keyboard keys are
referred to as Hot Keys in CAM2 Measure X. There are many more hot
keys listed in the back of this section.

FIGURE 3-4 Digital ReadOut

Pull-down Menus
On the top of the screen there is a pull-down menu bar. All the CAM2 Measure
X commands can be accessed from the menu bar using the mouse.

FIGURE 3-5 Pull-down menu bar

11
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Toolbar Buttons

Along the top of the screen are the toolbars. Toolbars consist of buttons
with pictures that represent the different commands. If the mouse is hovered
over a button for a few seconds a tool tip appears describing the function of the
tool bar button. A longer description also appears at the bottom of the screen in
the Status Bar.

FIGURE 3-6 Toolbar Buttons

Output Control Bar


On the bottom of the screen is the Output Control Bar. Instruction for the
Current Command appears here, so take a look at it often. The Output
Control Bar appears automatically when new text is added by the program, and
will collapse after a few seconds.

FIGURE 3-7 Output Control Bar

Status Bar
On the very bottom of the screen is the Status Bar. The description of the
highlighted command appears on this bar, as well as the current units and the
XYZ location of the cursor in the CAD coordinate system.

FIGURE 3-8 Status Bar

12
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Control Bars
Along the left side of the screen are the three Control Bars. The Navigator,
Saved Views, and CAD Parts bars provide quick access to some of the more
commonly used commands.

FIGURE 3-9 Control Bars

CAM2 Measure X HELP


CAM2 Measure X uses a standard Windows HTML Help file. You can search
through the help file by utilizing contents, index, or a keyword by using each
tab on the left side of the Help window. The CAM2 Measure XUser Manual is
also available on the User Manual CD-ROM. You can view, search, and print
the electronic file (*.pdf) using Adobe Acrobat Reader software.

About CAM2
About CAM2 Measure X displays the version, build number and FARO
Customer Service contact information.

FIGURE 3-10 About CAM2

13
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hotkeys - Viewing
Keys Command

i Zooms In

o Zooms Out

e Reset the View, or Zoom All

l Arrange Labels

WUXV Pan

a Device View (point the probe and press the


FRONT button to set the view)

^ Top View

% Side View

$ Front View

) Isometric View

C+t Center View

S+A+E Full Screen


S++ Increase Whisker Scale

- Decrease Whisker Scale

14
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)


Keys Command

+ Zooms In

- Zooms Out

8462 Pan

7 Rotate around X Counterclockwise

9 Rotate around X Clockwise

1 Rotate around Y Counterclockwise

3 Rotate around Y Clockwise

0 Rotate around Z Counterclockwise

. Rotate around Z Clockwise

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a L key which switches a


section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size
keyboard.

Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse)


Keys Command

S and drag the Right Mouse button Dynamic Zoom

Mouse Wheel Button Dynamic Zoom

C and drag the Right Mouse button Dynamic Pan

CS and drag the Right Mouse button Dynamic Rotate

15
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hotkeys - Commands
Keys Command

É Help

G Cancel

Ê Measure a Comp Off Point

! Measure a Comp Axis Point

Ë Measure a Plane

Ì Measure a 2D Line

Ò Measure a Circle

Ó Measure a Cylinder

Ô Measure a Sphere

d Turns off the DRO (digital read out)

p Change Probe

t Reset Interferometer (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

n Set Distance Mode (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

s Search (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

x Switch between Single Point and Scan Mode

m Material Thickness (Sheet Metal commands only)

I Collect Reading

H Compensation Point

B Remove Reading

16
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2


Measure X
• Use the toolbar buttons, or the pull-down menu bar to access
commands.

• CAM2 Measure X runs both with or without a FaroArm.

• CAM2 Measure X translates IGES, VDA, CATIA v4 and v5,


Unigraphics, Parasolid, SolidWorks, Solid Edge and OpenNURBS file
formats. For other CAD formats, use Rhino software to import your file
and save as an OpenNURBS file.

• Never turn off the computer while CAM2 Measure X is running.

17
Chapter 3: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and


FaroArm Certification
• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the procedure
for calibrating probes. After completing this section, the
student will be able to perform a proper probe calibration
technique.

Calibration and Certification


What is Calibration?
Probe calibration is a localized process by which a measurement device is
optimized to perform measurements accurately.

To understand probe calibration, you must first understand the FaroArm's


reference system. The FaroArm is factory calibrated from the base to the last
joint or axis, and the position of this joint is defined by the coordinate system
which originates at the base of the FaroArm. The last axis of the FaroArm has
its own coordinate system, and the location of the center of the ball probe is
reported in the probe's coordinate system. After the probe's coordinates are
established, these are translated into FaroArm coordinates and you are ready to
start taking measurements.

Measurement accuracy relies on probe calibration


under optimal conditions.To optimize calibration
and minimize stress-induced errors during this
critical procedure, place the FaroArm in a single
position in which the elbow joint remains relatively
stationary without any obstructions or restrictions in
movement while the calibration is performed; do
not flop the elbow joint during calibration. Only the
last joint of the FaroArm must be exercised for the
software to accurately calibrate the probe tip.
Minimizing elbow joint movement and focusing on
the probe and last arm joint during calibration
maximizes measurement accuracy.

19
Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Probe Calibration

The FaroArm collects data by touching your part with a probe attached to the
end of the handle. Once the probe is attached, the X,Y,Z location of the probe
tip, relative to the FaroArm's coordinate system, must be determined prior to
measuring. Since the circumference of the probe tip always touches the part,
the probe's center must be determined. This is why probe calibration is
necessary.

Calibrate the probe prior to every measurement session; or, if you are using
several probes, calibrate each probe any time you switch. While it is true that a
straight probe can be removed and replaced very accurately, it is still good
practice to perform the probe calibration.

There are two acceptable ways to calibrate a probe:

• Single Hole Method. Recommended for standard ball probes.

• Sphere Method. Recommended for touch trigger probes and point


probes.

In this course, we will present the Single Hole method.

Certification
Certification is the process by which a measurement device is tested to
determine its accuracy. In this course, we will practice the FARO Single Point
method for single point repeatability certification. This test can be quickly
performed before any measurement survey to ensure that the device is
performing within specification.

Probe Calibration
The probe calibration is the most critical task performed during any
measurement session. If the probe calibration is good, the measurements will
be accurate. If the probe calibration is bad, the measurements will not be
accurate.

XYZ Location

The last axis of the FaroArm has its own coordinate system. The
location of the center of the ball probe will be reported in this coordinate
system. Using the same probe, the FaroArm should be able to repeat this value
with better results than the single-point accuracy of the device.

20
Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Probe Calibration Error


A PASS condition indicates a result with a low calibration error (2 Sigma value
equals or below device specification). A FAIL condition indicates a result with
a high calibration error (2 Sigma value above device specification).

FIGURE 4-1 Probe Calibration

Single Hole Method

The Single Hole calibration is performed using the


FARO probe calibration cone or a 5mm machine
drilled hole. The hole does not have to be exactly
5mm, but it must be smaller than the probe’s Position #1
diameter with a smooth seat.

All of the points in this method will be collected by


holding down the FRONT button. The FaroArm
will collect points as fast as possible (scanning) Position #2

until the FRONT button is released.


Position #3

Auxiliary Switch
To use a Renishaw touch probe, activate the Auxiliary switch by selecting the
EDIT button. Be sure to deactivate it when using a hard probe. Calibrate this
probe using the Sphere Calibration method. For more information about the
Sphere Calibration method, click the HELP button in the SPHERE
CALIBRATION dialog box or your FaroArm manual. You may also find
additional information at www.faro.com, or by contacting FARO Customer
Service.

21
Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Probe Calibration and


FaroArm Certification
• The probe diameter must be specified prior to performing a probe
calibration.

• Probe calibration should be performed anytime the probe is changed or


the probe is damaged.

• The Single Point Certification test is a quick way to see if the FaroArm
is calibrated correctly.

• Proper technique is the most important factor in achieving a good probe


calibration.

22
Chapter 4: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and Instructors


FaroArm Certification Practical Comments
Enter
Practical Exercise
Comments Here
This exercise will calibrate the probe and perform a single-point certification.

Probe Calibration
The Single Hole calibration is performed using the FARO Calibration Cone, or
machined hole smaller than the diameter of the ball probe. The machined hole
must have a smooth seat, and the ball probe must fix securely in the hole.

Calibrate Probe
1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

FIGURE 5-1 Probe Calibration

2 ❑ From the CURRENT PROBE pull down, select 6mm Ball Probe.

3 ❑ Click the Single Hole Method button.

4 ❑ Place the ball probe in the cone in the horizontal position #1.

23
Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Press and hold the FRONT button.

• Sweep the handle up to vertical position. Be sure that the


ball probe remains seated in the hole
• Release the FRONT button.

FIGURE 5-2 Single Hole Method Sweep 1

CAUTION: The probe must be well-seated in the hole when digitizing all
calibration points. Even one or two poorly digitized points significantly
affects the optimization process, which then has an effect on the accuracy
of the FaroArm.

6 ❑ Place the ball probe in the cone in the horizontal position #2.

7 ❑ Press and hold the FRONT button.

• Sweep the handle up to vertical position. Be sure that


the ball probe remains seated in the hole
• Release the FRONT button.

FIGURE 5-3 Single Hole Method Sweep 2

8 ❑ Place the ball probe in the cone in the horizontal position #3.

9 ❑ Press and hold the FRONT button.

• Sweep the handle up to vertical position. Be sure that the ball


probe remains seated in the hole
• Release the FRONT button.

FIGURE 5-4 Single Hole Method Sweep 3

24
Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Press the BACK button

11 ❑ Check the Calibration.

• If Calibration Status = Passed,


click OK.
• If Calibration Status = Failed,
click the RETRY button and
repeat step 4 though 10.

FIGURE 5-5 Pass or Fail?

12 ❑ Repeat the probe calibration two more times.

Results

1 ❑ Click the VIEW LOG button.

FIGURE 5-6 View Log

2 ❑ Compete the following table.

Results:
DX1=______(X1-X2), DY1=______(Y1-Y2), DZ1=______(Z1-Z2)
DX2=______(X2-X3), DY2=______(Y2-Y3), DZ2=______(Z2-Z3)
DX3=______(X3-X1), DY3=______(Y3-Y1), DZ3=______(Z3-Z1)

NOTE: Results should be half the two sigma single point accuracy of the
measurement device. Two sigma single point accuracy is specified on the
device label.

25
Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Certification
S/N: P08020100763 Date:
Nov 18, 2001
Certified 2 Sigma
Model: P08 Rev: 4.4 Single Point Accuracy: +/- .025 mm.

MADE IN U.S.A.

FIGURE 5-7 Certified two sigma single point accuracy

Single Point Certification


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CERTIFICATION < SINGLE
POINT.

2 ❑ Place the probe in any of the small holes (P1 - P4) of the FARO
standard demonstration part - base, or in the FARO calibration cone.

3 ❑ Press the FRONT button to start taking points. Take 50 points.


Distribute the points evenly, while fully articulating the FaroArm.

4 ❑ Press the BACK button when done.

5 ❑ Enter information into the ENTER HEADER IMFORMATION dialog box


for the certification report:

• Operator Name = Your Name.


• Name of Part = Single Point Test.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 5-8 Enter Header Information

6 ❑ The measured 2 sigma value of X,Y and Z should be less than the
specified 2 sigma value for X,Y and Z. Also, the 2 sigma length should
be less than the 2 sigma linear displacement accuracy of the device. If
not, repeat the test.

26
Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Save the certification report to a file.

• Click the SAVE button.

• Click OK to FILE SAVED.

8 ❑ Click OK.

NOTE: The certification file is saved as the serial number.txt in the SPC
Graph directories: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Faro\SPC Graph\Part Name\Serial Number.txt.

27
Chapter 5: Probe Calibration and FaroArm Certification Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Feature Measurement Instructors


Comments
• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate proper
measurement and compensation techniques. After Enter
completion of this section the student will learn to measure
geometric features properly. They will also be able to Comments Here
differentiate the differences between measured, constructed
and nominal features.

Types of Features
There are two basic types of features in CAM2 Measure X. 2D Features
require a plane of projection, and 3D Features do not.

29
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2D Features

A 2D feature requires a plane of projection. When selecting a 2D feature from


the measurement menu, the Select Plane dialog box will appear. You will
always need to select the plane to which the points will be projected. A good
way to tell if a feature is 2D is the appearance of the dialog box.

FIGURE 6-1 Select Plane

2
1

5 4
1. Rectangular Slot 2. Circles
3. Round Slot 4. Ellipse
5. 2D Line
FIGURE 6-2 2D Features

30
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3D Features

A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection. 3D features also have


some depth and are displayed as surfaces within CAM2 Measure X.

2
3

1. Cone 2. Sphere
3. Cylinders
FIGURE 6-3 3D Features

31
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compensation
After the FaroArm’s probe has been calibrated you are ready to start
measuring. When measuring with a ball probe, a point is taken in the center of
the probe each time the FRONT button is pressed. The point actually needs to
be projected the radius of the probe in order for the measurement to be taken in
the correct location. The distance between the point of contact and the center of
the probe is known as Probe Offset. This transfer of the point from the center
of the probe to the correct location is known as probe compensation.

1. Probe Tip 2. Center of the probe


3. Probe Offset
FIGURE 6-4 Probe Offset

NOTE: The location of the probe is extremely important when the BACK
button of the FaroArm is pressed.

32
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

To better explain this subject here are a few examples.

Plane Compensation

FIGURE 6-5 Plane Measurement

A plane is defined using the center of the probe for each point taken with the
FRONT button as shown below.

FIGURE 6-6 Pre-Plane

33
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

This plane can then be compensated in one of two directions. The correct
compensation depends on where the BACK button is pressed. In this situation
the BACK button is to be pressed above the plane. The plane will then be
compensated down the distance equal to the probe radius.

FIGURE 6-7 Probe Compensation

34
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compensation of a 2D Feature
When measuring a 2D feature the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears. Each
point of the 2D feature is automatically projected to that selected plane.
Compensation for the probe diameter will be performed when measuring 2D
features. When measuring a hole, the hole will be measured as a circle
projected to a selected plane. The compensation point is taken by pressing the
BACK button inside the hole for an inner diameter, outside the post for an
outer diameter. This inner diameter concept is demonstrated below.

Measure at least three points inside the hole.

FIGURE 6-8 Circle Measurement

Each time the FRONT button is pressed that point is automatically projected to
the selected plane.

FIGURE 6-9 Plane Projection

35
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

A circle is defined.

FIGURE 6-10 Pre-Compensated Circle

By compensating in the center of the hole the circle is offset the distance equal
to the radius of the probe. This results in the correct diameter.

FIGURE 6-11 Circle Compensation

36
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Review Features
Review Features allows the operator to see every feature that has been
measured or constructed in a particular measurement session. All data is
displayed in the current alignment.

Printing
From Review Features a graphical text report can be printed to a printer, saved
to a file, or e-mailed.

Erasing

Delete extra or un-needed features with the DELETE icon, or with the

ERASE button in the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

Important Topics - Feature Measurement


• A 2D feature requires a plane of projection.

• A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection.

• The FRONT button is used to take measured points. The BACK button
is used to compensate for the radius of the probe.

37
Chapter 6: Feature Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 7: Feature Measurement


Practical
Practical Exercises
Execute Mode
EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run pre-programmed measurement
routines. To help get accustomed to the FaroArm, measure several of the pre-
programmed measurements.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the
portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File


(*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 7-1 Choose File type

4 ❑ From the LIST window, select 10REF088_XLN Basic


Measurements.

FIGURE 7-2 Select the Basic Measurements Program

5 ❑ Click the EXECUTE button.

39
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Wait a few seconds while the CAD file loads.

7 ❑ Read each COMMENT box.

FIGURE 7-3 Comment box

8 ❑ Click the OK button to clear the comments box.

9 ❑ Follow the glowing targets to measure the points using the FRONT
button on the FaroArm.

10 ❑ Once all the points for a feature are measured, a trickle down tone will
be played by the computer. Press the BACK button on the FaroArm.

REMEMBER: The location of where the BACK button is pressed


determines the direction of the probe compensation.

11 ❑ Measure all the features in the program in the same manner.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen


label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange
these on-screen labels

The measurement routine is automatically performing alignments,


constructions, and dimensions. These commands will be discussed in detail
in the following chapters.

12 ❑ After the last measurement, the program will prompt the operator to
measure another part, press the FRONT button for YES.

FIGURE 7-4 Repeat the Program?

40
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

View Control
Run the program again.

Try the following view commands:

Hot Keys - Viewing

Keys Command

i Zooms In

o Zooms Out

e Reset the View, or Zoom All

WUXV Pan

a Device View (point the probe and press the


FRONT button to set the view)

^ Top View

% Side View

$ Front View

) Isometric View

C+t Center View

S+A+E Full Screen


S++ Increase Whisker Scale

- Decrease Whisker Scale

41
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hot Keys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)

Keys Command

+ Zooms In

- Zooms Out

8462 Pan

7 Rotate around X Counterclockwise

9 Rotate around X Clockwise

1 Rotate around Y Counterclockwise

3 Rotate around Y Clockwise

0 Rotate around Z Counterclockwise

. Rotate around Z Clockwise

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a L key which switches a


section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size
keyboard.

At the end of the program, when prompted to measure another part, press the
BACK button for NO. The graphics screen now contains all of the features that
have just been measured and all of the nominal features from the program.

42
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Review Features
To view the measurement data, use the Review Features command.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

FIGURE 7-5 Review Features

2 ❑ Take a look at the features by selecting them in the FEATURE LIST.

NOTE: Measurements have the M_ prefix. Constructions have the C_


prefix. Nominals have the N_ prefix.

43
Chapter 7: Feature Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 8: Basic Part


Measurements
• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will introduce coordinate
systems and alignments. After completion of this section,
the student will understand the concepts of plane (3), line
(2), and point (1) reducibility. The student will gain an
understanding of how and why coordinate systems are
used.

Coordinate Systems
What is a Coordinate System?
Coordinate systems are XYZ reference frames built from measured features.
Start by measuring the features that will be used to construct a coordinate
system. These are sometimes called datum features.

CAM2 Measure X offers many ways to establish coordinate systems, in this


section two of the most common coordinate systems: the 3-2-1 and the Line-
Line will be presented. CAM2 Measure X allows the operator to set up
several different coordinate systems and switch between them. New
coordinate systems can be created from existing coordinate systems.

45
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Two coordinate systems that are used in this class:

1 The XYZ coordinate system of the measurement device and of the


nominal features are known as the World Coordinate System or WCS
(1).

2 The XYZ coordinates that are constructed from a coordinate system on


the part are known as the Users Coordinate System or UCS (2).

1 Device, Software or Nominal Coordinate System


2 Part or Constructed Coordinate System
FIGURE 8-1 Coordinate System

Alignments
What is an Alignment?

The term alignment comes from the traditional CMM (Coordinate


Measuring Machine) to indicate that the part needs to be aligned to the
coordinate system of the machine.

In CAM2 Measure X, the coordinate system of the measured features is


aligned with the coordinate system of nominal features. This allows you to
compare the measured part to the design data. The process is also known as
CAD to Part alignment.

An alignment should be established as soon as possible.

46
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Feature Reducibility
Feature Reducibility is a term used to describe that one type of feature can be
used like another type for alignments, constructions and dimensions.

For example, a circle is point reducible, that means it can be used like a
point for alignments, constructions, or dimensions.

FIGURE 8-2 Point Reducability

A Circle is also Line reducible and Plane reducible.

FIGURE 8-3 Line and Plane Reducability

47
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Feature Reducibility Exercise


Complete the following feature reducibility table:

Plane Line Point

Arc X X X

Circle X X X

Cylinder X

Cone X X X

Ellipse X X X

Line X
Plane X

Point X

48
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Plane Line Point

Rectan-
gular Slot
X X X

Round
Slot
X X X

Sphere X

49
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Constructions
What is a Construction?
A construction allows you to create features that cannot be measured directly.
Sometimes points or other features are specified on a drawing but do not
actually exist on the part. For example, the intersection of two lines where the
corner has a fillet or radius.

Common Constructions
The following is a list of some of the more common constructions used in basic
measurement:

1 Point:
• Line/Line: Intersection of two lines.

• Line/Feature: Intersection of line and another feature. (Such as


plane or sphere)

FIGURE 8-4 Intersection Point

50
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 Circle:
• Best-fit: Bolt circle diameters.

FIGURE 8-5 Bolt Hole Circle

3 Plane:
• Parallel: Constructs a plane at a known distance from another plane.

• Bisector: Constructs a plane between two planes.

There are many constructions available. Review the constructions to evaluate


which commands can be applied to a measurement task.

51
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Dimensions
What is a Dimension?
A dimension describes the relationship between two or more features. There
are several types of dimensions available in CAM2 Measure X:

1 Length: Displays the 3D distance between two features as well as the


change in X, Y and Z.

FIGURE 8-6 Point to Point distance

FIGURE 8-7 Point to Line distance

52
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 8-8 Point to Plane distance

53
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 Angle: Displays the angle between two (or three) features.

FIGURE 8-9 Angle Line to Line

3 Orientation: These are geometric dimensioning and tolerancing


(GD&T) features that display a length result. CAM2 Measure X has a
separate pull-down menu for a variety of GD&T dimensions.

54
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Tricky Dimensions
Most CAM2 Measure X dimensions are fairly straight forward, but there are
few that are confusing:

Dimension > Length > Line to Line, or Dimension > Length > Plane to Plane:

This gives the minimum distance between two features. The length is
measured from the center point of one feature to the perpendicular distance
of the other feature. Selecting the features in the opposite order will
generate a different result.

FIGURE 8-10 Dimension Line/Line or Plane/Plane

A measured or constructed point on one of the features and the


Dimension > Length > Point to Line, or
Dimension > Length > Point to Plane command provides the best solution.

55
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Basic Part Measurement


• All coordinate systems behave in the same manner. Each coordinate
system requires a plane, a line, and a point.

• Feature reducibility is a term used to describe a feature for coordinate


systems, constructions, and dimensions.

• A best fit circle is constructed using at least three point reducible


features.

56
Chapter 8: Basic Part Measurements
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 9: Basic Part


Measurements Practical
Practical Exercise
Using the base plate of the demo part, complete a typical measurement session.
In the first exercise, the EXECUTE command was used. This exercise will
allow you to be more independent and select the commands from the pull-
down menu bar

Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of
the plate will be the base plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis
and origin respectively.

1
C P3 8 2 P4 D
9
10
F 7 3

A 4 B
P1 6 P2

FIGURE 9-1 FARO Demonstration Part

Setting the Alignment


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

As default, CAM2 Measure X automatically loads millimeters as the units, ±


1.27 as the tolerances, and a DRO display of 4 numbers after the decimal. It is
very likely that your part will not use these values. However, CAM2 Measure
X has the ability to modify, save and load part preferences.

57
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

If a student asks 1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

why are we 2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.


loading these
• Drawing Units = Millimeters.
tolerances files,
• Click OK.
point them to
the
TOLERANCE FIGURE 9-2 Drawing Units
tab and tell 3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.
them that this
4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.
part uses
0.25mm • Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp
tolerances. file.
• Click OPEN.
Loading the
Metric-
0.25mm.xpp
FIGURE 9-3 Load Tolerances
file modifies all
the tolerance 5 ❑ Click OK.
values for all 28 NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to
feature types. ±0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to
CAM2 Measure.

58
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

7 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 9-4 Measure XY Plane

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The CENTER XYZ values


describe the location of the
center of the plane.
• The NORMAL IJK values
describe the direction of
the plane.
• RMS is the Root Mean
Square value of the fit.

• STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit.


• MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit.
• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.
• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure
the plane.
FIGURE 9-5 Plane Results

NOTE: The number of digits for the label (001) is determined by the
Application Preference, Miscellaneous, Number of Digits for Label. The
default value is three.

NOTE: The decimal place values are determined by the Part Preference,
Display Decimal Places. The default value is four places to the left, three to
the right.

59
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ After accepting a plane, press the BACK button or the ESC key to
cancel the plane measurement command.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure always continues to measure additional features


until receiving a command to stop. Stop, or Cancel, the command by
pressing the BACK button or by pressing the ESC key.

10 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

11 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 9-6 Select Plane

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an on-
screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically
arrange these on-screen labels

60
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the
edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B.

• Take four or five points


on the side of the plate
by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 9-7 Measure X Axis

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The POINT XYZ values


describe the first point on
the line.
• The AXIS IJK values
describe the direction of
the line.
• RMS is the Root Mean
Square value of the fit.

• STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit.


• MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit.
• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.
• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure
the line.
FIGURE 9-8 Line Results

61
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ Continue with the Measure 2D Line command.

• Measure the line nearest


Slot F. Measure in the
direction from Sphere A
towards Sphere C.

FIGURE 9-9 Measure Y Intercept

NOTE: The Part Preference for Auto Plane Selection is set to LAST
(default). This will place all 2D features on the last plane selected in the
SELECT PLANE dialog.

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• If everything looks good,


press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button to
reject. Then re-measure
the line.

FIGURE 9-10 Line Results

62
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

16 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


LINE/LINE.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001
• Select a Line = M_LINE002.
• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-11 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

NOTE: The Z Rotation IJK is the vector of the previous Z Axis relative to
the new Z Axis. The Translation XYZ values shows where the coordinate
system has moved. The Z Angle Rotation is the angle between the previous
Z Axis and the new Z Axis. RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit.
STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit. MAX AND MIN describe
the measured point above and below the fit. FORM is the sum of MAX and
MIN.

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system results.

18 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART (This step will be
discussed in the next chapter).

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK. S

FIGURE 9-12 CAD=Part Alignment

63
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment results.

FIGURE 9-13 Base Plate Alignment

Feature Measurements
Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is labeled 1.
See “FARO Demonstration Part” on page 57.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 9-14 Select Plane

64
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is
labeled 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 9-15 Measure Circle 1

NOTE: In the RESULTS dialog box, the View Style changes from Simple to
Tabular. After any alignment command, the View Style automatically
changes to the Tabular style.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The CENTER XYZ values


describe the location of
the center of the circle.
• The DIAMETER value
describes the Diameter of
the circle.
• FORM is the sum of MAX
and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button to reject. Then re-measure
the circle.
FIGURE 9-16 Circle Results

65
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure circles until the


command is canceled.

• Continue measuring all


eight circles in the
pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 9-17 Measure Circles 2 through 8

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an on-
screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically
arrange these on-screen labels.

FIGURE 9-18 Measured Circles 1 through 8

66
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Constructions
Determine the diameter of the bolt circle pattern of the eight holes.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001 through


M_CIRCLE008.
• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.
• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-19 Construct Circle Best Fit

2 ❑ Take a look a the results.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.
This is the new name for
this feature.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-20 Changing a Feature Label

NOTE: Was the circle accepted before changing the label? You can change
the feature label later using the REVIEW FEATURES command.

67
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Changing Labels from Review Features


NOTE: If the feature label was not changed in the RESULTS dialog, use the
following steps to correct the feature label.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Double left mouse click on the bolt circle from the list of features.

• Select a Feature = C_CIRCLE001.

NOTE: The first object created in the file will be at the bottom of the list,
the most recent feature at the top of the list.

3 ❑ Change the label. Type BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Select a Feature = BOLT_CIRCLE.

FIGURE 9-21 Review Features

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

68
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Dimensions
To establish some dimensions measure a couple more features.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the
surface of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-22 Measure Sphere A

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The CENTER XYZ values


describe the location of the
center of the circle.
• The DIAMETER value
describes the Diameter of
the circle.
• FORM is the sum of MAX
and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the FRONT button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good, press the BACK button twice to reject. Then
remeasure the sphere.
FIGURE 9-23 Sphere Results

69
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure spheres until the


command is canceled. Continue measuring Sphere D.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the
surface of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-24 Measure Sphere D

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• If everything looks good,


press the FRONT button
button to accept the
results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then remeasure the
sphere.

FIGURE 9-25 Sphere Results

6 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select LENGTH < POINT/POINT.

• Select 1st Point = M_SPHERE001.


• Select 2nd Point = M_SPHERE002.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-26 Dimension Length Point/Point

NOTE: Choose features from the drop-down list box, or use the FROM
SCREEN button to pick it from the screen. In CAM2 Measure X dialog
boxes, all feature drop-down list boxes have a FROM SCREEN
button so you can choose the feature from the CAD screen instead of the
list box.

70
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The DELTA XYZ values


describe the distance
between the two center
points along each axis.
• The LENGTH value
describes the straight
distance between the two
center points.
• Click OK to accept the
results.
FIGURE 9-27 Dimension Results

8 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE < APEX.

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I.


• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I.
• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 9-28 Dimension Angle Apex

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The ANGLE value is the


angle between the three
points.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 9-29 Angle Results

71
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


View the results of the features using the REVIEW FEATURES command.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

FIGURE 9-30 Review Features

2 ❑ Click the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s name = your name.


• Name of the part = Basic
Measurements.
• Serial number of the current part =
0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-31 Enter Header Information

72
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Simple.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 9-32 Report List

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

FIGURE 9-33 Report Preview

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• File name = Basic Measurement.


• Save as type = MHTML Files
(*.mht).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 9-34 Save As

73
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save The Measurements


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Basic Measurement.


• Save as type = CAM2 Measure
Document (*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 9-35 Save As

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X saves files in the CAM2 Measure Document


(*.fce) format.

Additional Coordinate Systems


If for some reason the alignment is not correct, or a different coordinate system
is required, CAM2 Measure X is able to set up additional coordinate systems.
For this exercise use the top surface of the plate, two spheres to define a line,
and the center point of the bolt circle.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the
surface of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 9-36 Measure Sphere B

74
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• If everything looks good,


press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 9-37 Sphere Results

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM


< 3-2-1.

NOTE: Notice that the base plane can define something other than +XY,
and the line can define something other than +X in the 3-2-1 coordinate
system.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


• Direction of Plane = +YZ.
• Select the radio button next to FIRST
POINT ON AXIS.
• First Point on Axis = M_SPHERE001.
• Second Point on Axis = M_SPHERE003.
• Direction of Axis = +Y.
• Select Origin = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.
• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 9-38 3-2-1 Coordinate System

NOTE: This creates a new coordinate system to view the data. The X axis
is perpendicular to M_PLANE001. The Y axis is parallel to a line between
M_SPHERE001 and M_SPHERE003. The origin is located at the center of
the bolt circle, C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

75
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Switching between coordinate systems.


The blue coordinate system icon shows the active coordinate system. The
green coordinate system icon shows the non-active coordinate systems. There
are two ways to change the active coordinate system.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


SET ACTIVE.

• Set Active = C_COORDSYS001.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-39 Set Active Coordinate System

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the corner of the plate.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

• Current Coordinate
System =
C_COORDSYS002.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 9-40 Set Active Coordinate System from Review Features

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the center of the bolt circle.
Save Again
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the
SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name,
select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

76
Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 10: Checking a Part Instructors


Comments
• Objective: The instructor will introduce nominals and how
to compare measured objects to them. The students will be Enter
able to measure a feature and have CAM2 Measure X
determine if the dimension is out of tolerance. Comments Here
Nominals
What is a Nominal?
A nominal is the true value of a feature. The measured value of a part should be
equal to or as close to the nominal value as possible. Compare
measurements to nominals to see if a part is good or bad (or to update
the print to match the part).

Types of Nominals
The engineering or design department will provide a 3D CAD (Computer
Aided Design) file or a print that contains the nominal information for the part.
CAM2 Measure X has several methods to enter nominals into the file for
comparison to the measurements.

1 Enter Values: Circles, Cones, Cylinders, Ellipses, Lines, Planes,


Points, Slots, and Spheres are created by typing the known value. This
is typically used when working with a paper drawing or hard copy,
rather than an electronic copy of the CAD file.

2 From CAD: Translate, and add CAD models through IGES, VDA,
CATIA® v4 and v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid
Edge® and OpenNURBS formats. Then select the feature from the
screen to add it to the CAM2 Measure X database as a nominal.

3 Construct Nominal: Sometimes, when working with CAD data, holes


and other features are not displayed as separate entities, but rather they
only exist as edges of surfaces or solids. CAM2 Measure X can
construct a nominals by selecting points along the trimmed edge of a
surface.

77
Chapter 10: Checking a Part
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

CAD to Part Alignments


Nominals are considered CAD and measurements are considered the Part. To
compare measured data to nominals, a CAD to Part type alignment must be
completed. This course will focus on the two commands; CAD=PART and
ITERATIVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not compare the XYZ information of a


measured feature to a nominal feature without an alignment.

CAD=Part
This command requires that some type of constructed coordinate system on the
part using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current
coordinate system equal to the CAD (or Nominal) coordinate system. This will
overlay the measurements onto the CAD (or Nominal) data.

To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the
coordinate system on the CAD (or Nominal) data. In many cases the origin of
the coordinate system will not be on the part. A rotation or a translation must
be performed to get the coordinate system on the part to match the CAD (or
Nominal) data.

The SCALE option allows the operator to adjust the measurement scale of the
part, and adjust for temperature changes in the environment.

NOTE: Only use this functionality with very large parts, and are measuring
over a extended period of time.

Important Topics - Checking a Part


• CAD (or Nominal) data are the design values for the part.

• Create Nominal data in three different ways: From CAD, Enter Values,
and Construct Nominals.

• A “CAD to Part” alignment must be successfully completed in order to


compare measurements to nominals.

78
Chapter 10: Checking a Part
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 11: Checking a Part


Practical
Practical Exercise
Use a drawing for nominal information. Measure alignment features, construct
a coordinate system, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features,
create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your
work.

Getting the Nominals


In this exercise check the demo part base using the reference drawing.

5 4 3 2 1

65 20
[2.56] [.787]

D .50 167 .50 B D


B [6.575]
130
50 [5.118]
[1.969] 50
20 [1.969]
15 65
[.591] 25 [.787] 20
[2.559]
[.984] 15 [.787]
25 15 [.591] 15 20
[.984] [.591] [.591] [.787]

30
50 [1.181]
65
[1.969]
C [2.559] C

265
160 [10.433]
[6.299] B
4X 5
240
[.197]
[9.449]
170
255 [6.693] 300
[10.04] [11.811]

50
[1.969] B 150
.50 C
[5.906]
B B

100
40
[3.94] 50
[1.575]
.50 A [1.969]
C
60 15 25
[2.362] 15 [.591] [.984]
[.591] EQ. SP. ON A .50
15 8X +0.25
20 [0.798] -0.10 A
30 140 [5.512] BC
[.591]
[1.181] 30 Ø 1.0 M A B C
[1.181]
15°
A THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS A
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE:
IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE
INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL ±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°
AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28
TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING Armed with Quality
SECTION B-B IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND
63 FINSH REQUIRED INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100
AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY
TITLE
IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF
FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. BASE, DEMO FIXTURE
03FRM049-REV 1
5 4 3 2 1

FIGURE 11-1 FARO Demonstration Part

Datum features are specified in the print. The top surface is Datum A, the left
edge is Datum B and the center circle is Datum C. Since the print does not
show an X, Y, Z coordinate system, Datum A will be the XY plane, Datum B

79
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

will be the X axis and Datum C will be the origin of the coordinate system
(This may vary depending on the part).

Setting the Alignment


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-2 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 11-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK.

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

80
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Measure Datum A as a plane.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 11-4 Measure XY Plane

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_A.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 11-5 Plane Results

9 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 11-6 Select Plane

81
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

• Take four or five points


on the side of the plate
by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 11-7 Measure X Axis

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_B.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 11-8 Line Results

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen


label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange
these on-screen labels

13 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

14 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 11-9 Select Plane

82
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Measure Datum C as a circle.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button for
compensation.

FIGURE 11-10 Measure Circle 9

16 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_C.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 11-11 Circle Results

17 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM


< 3-2-1.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.


• Direction of Plane = +XY.
• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = M_DATUM_C.
• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 11-12 3-2-1 Coordinate System

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

83
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

19 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = NONE.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 11-13 CAD=Part Alignment

20 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

This saves the position of the part as an alignment.

Begin checking the features on the part. Remember to perform the CAD to
Part type alignment to see the measured compared to the nominal values.

FIGURE 11-14 Datum Alignment

84
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Save The Measurements

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Checking a Part.


• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X
Document (*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 11-15 Save As

Measuring Features and Adding Nominals

After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the XYZ and diameter values can be
extracted from the print:

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 1 0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm


Circle 3 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm
Circle 5 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm
Circle 7 -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as


indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part base.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 11-16 Select Plane

85
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button for
compensation.
• Label =
CIRCLE001_I.
FIGURE 11-17 Measure Circle 1

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 11-18 Results Nominal Tab

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-19 Construct Circle Enter Values

86
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

• X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.


• Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.
• Z = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.
• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.
• MMC = unchecked.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 11-20 Results Tolerance Tab

7 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the


tolerance information for the next circle

8 ❑ Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured
and the nominal.

FIGURE 11-21 Tabular Results

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

87
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button for
compensation.
• Label =
CIRCLE003_I.
FIGURE 11-22 Measure Circle 3

11 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 11-23 Results Nominal Tab

12 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-24 Construct Circle Enter Values

88
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

14 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button for
compensation.
• Label =
CIRCLE005_I.
FIGURE 11-25 Measure Circle 5

15 ❑ Click OK to accept the results. The nominal will be created in Review


Features.

16 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button for
compensation.
• Label =
CIRCLE007_I.
FIGURE 11-26 Measure Circle 7

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the RESULTS. The nominal will be created in


Review Features.

89
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Adding a Nominal through Review Features


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select M_CIRCLE005_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list.

3 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

4 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-27 Construct Circle Enter Values

6 ❑ Select M_CIRCEL007_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list.

7 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

8 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 11-28 Construct Circle Enter Values

90
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

2 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Checking a Part.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 11-29 Enter Header Information

3 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features that are “On” the report
will have a check mark in the ON/OFF
column. To add or remove features
from the report, click the check box to
the left of the feature.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 11-30 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in
Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

4 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

91
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename =
Checking a
Part.
• Save as type =
MHTML Files
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 11-31 Save Report

6 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the
SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name,
select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

92
Chapter 11: Checking a Part Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 12: Move Device Position


• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to move
the measurement device to increase the working volume.
After completing this section, the student will be able to
move the measurement device, allowing them to measure
large parts in a single file.

Purpose
The Move Device Position command has two functions:

• It moves the device to a new location within the same coordinate


system.

• It realigns the device to the part if the relationship has changed.

Moving the Device


This is the original intent for the Move Device Position command. It allows
you measure a part on which the device can not measure the features from one
location. Measure 3 or more point-reducible features, run the Move Device
Position command, move the device, and remeasure the features.

NOTE: Comp Axis points can not be used in the Move Device Position
command. The compensation direction is based upon the active alignment.
When the device moves, the active alignment is not valid.

There is a penalty. Every time the device is moved the device may incur
additional error. To minimize the error, the features should be as far apart
as possible while still allowing the device to move to the new location.

To maintain very accurate measurements avoid using the Move Device


Position command by placing the device in an ideal location.

93
Chapter 12: Move Device Position
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Realign the Part to the Device

If the setup gets disturbed, use the Move Device Position command to
reestablish the alignment between the part and the device. There must be 3 or
more point-reducible features in the file. They should be as far apart as
possible to minimize error.

Important Topics - Move Device Position


• The Move Device Position command may be used to move the device
to a new location or to realign the device to the part if the part has
moved.

• After using the Move Device Position command, a loss of accuracy


may occur.

94
Chapter 12: Move Device Position
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 13: Move Device Position


Practical
Practical Exercise
In this exercise align to a CAD file, relocate the Device relative to the part, and
realign using the Move Device Position command.

1
C P3 8 2 P4 D
9
10
F 7 3

A 4 B
P1 6 P2

FIGURE 13-1 FARO Demonstration Part

Importing CAD File


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-2 Drawing Units

95
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 13-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

• Automatically Associate
Nominals = clear (or Off).

FIGURE 13-4 Auto Nominal Association

NOTE: Turning off the Auto Nominal Association will prevent the points
measured in this chapter from associating to the nominal CAD file. If the
option is On, CAM2 Measure X will associate the measured points to the
nominal circle and modify the label from POINTXXX to CIRCLEXXX.

6 ❑ Click OK.

96
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part2.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 13-5 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD


Data files (*.fcm).
• Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part2.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 13-6 Adding CAD Parts

97
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the
ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 13-7 FARO_Demo_Part2 CAD file

Setting the Coordinate System


Another feature of CAM2 Measure X is the ability to create a new coordinate
system by translating or rotating an existing coordinate system. This feature is
helpful when you cannot construct a coordinate system from measured features
on your part to correspond with the location of the coordinate system of the
CAD model. In this exercise, in addition to learning the Move Device Position
command, we will also practice translating a coordinate system. The steps
below will guide you through the process.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 13-8 Measure XY Plane

98
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 13-9 Plane Results

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 13-10 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 13-11 Measure Circle 9

99
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE009_I.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 13-12 Circle 9 Results

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

9 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 13-13 Select Plane

10 ❑ Measure a 2D line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G.

• Take four or five points


on the side of the plate
by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 13-14 Measure X Axis

100
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 13-15 Line Results

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


3-2-1.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.


• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009_I.
• Select the CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 13-16 3-2-1 Coordinate System

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

101
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


TRANSLATION. Use the following values:

• Select X Origin = C_COORDSYS001.


• X Offset = -150.0.
• Select Y Origin = C_COORDSYS001.
• Y Offset = -65.0.
• Select Z Origin =
C_COORDSYS001.
• Z Offset = 0.0.
• Coordinate System =
C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the CONSTRUCTED radio
button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 13-17 Translate Coordinate System

15 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

16 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS002.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 13-18 CAD=Part Alignment

102
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 13-19 CAD to Part Alignment

Save The Measurements


18 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• The SAVE AS dialog box appears.


• File name = Move Device
Position.
• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X
Document (*.fce).
• Click SAVE.
FIGURE 13-20 Save As

Measure Features for the Move Device Position


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINTS > COMP OFF.

103
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Measure Point 1.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-21 Measure Point 1

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.
• Click OK to accept the
point.

FIGURE 13-22 Point 1 Results

4 ❑ Measure Point 2.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-23 Measure Point 2

104
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT002.
• Click OK to accept the
point.

FIGURE 13-24 Point 2 Results

6 ❑ Measure Point 3.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-25 Measure Point 3

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT003.
• Click OK to accept the
point.

FIGURE 13-26 Point 3 Results

105
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Measure Point 4.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-27 Measure Point 4

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT004.
• Click OK to accept the
point.

FIGURE 13-28 Point 4 Results

Performing the Move Device Position Command


1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select MOVE DEVICE POSITION.

• Selected Choices = M_POINT001,


M_POINT002, M_POINT003,
M_POINT004.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-29 Move Device Position

NOTE: Using 2D features (Arc, Circle, Slot) CAM2 Measure X requires

106
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

you to measure a plane for each feature.

2 ❑ Move the Measurment Device (Move the device, or move the part).

3 ❑ Click OK in the MOVE THE DEVICE dialog.

4 ❑ Measure Point 1.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-30 Measure Point 1

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

6 ❑ Measure Point 2.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-31 Measure Point 2

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

107
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Measure Point 3.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-32 Measure Point 3

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

10 ❑ Measure Point 4.

• Take a point by pressing


the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button
to end the measurement.

FIGURE 13-33 Measure Point 4

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the point. The results of the Device Move are
displayed.

FIGURE 13-34 Device Position Results

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the new Device Position.

108
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Add Measurements to an Existing Feature


If you have a large feature that can not be totally measured from one location,
CAM2 Measure X allows you to add points to the feature. This will update the
feature location and all associated constructions, coordinate systems, and
dimensions used with this feature.

13 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

14 ❑ Select M_CIRCLE009_I.

FIGURE 13-35 Review Features

15 ❑ Click the EDIT button.

• Select the ADD READINGS radio button.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 13-36 Add Readings

16 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 13-37 Measure Circle 9

109
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

The points, or Readings, are now added to the feature and M_CIRCLE009_I is
recalculated.

17 ❑ Click on the READINGS tab.

FIGURE 13-38 Circle 9 Readings

NOTE: The measured circle has points, or Readings, from both device
positions.

18 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the
SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name,
select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

110
Chapter 13: Move Device Position Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks


The Measurement Track
There are numerous ways to approach the same task, and some ways are easier
than others. This section presents the Measurement Track, a good rule of
thumb procedure to help guide you through the measurement tasks.

Examine the Task


Before you start taking measurements, determine why the part is being
inspected and what results are expected. Measuring without direction will yield
voluminous data that will make it difficult to find the answers to the original
question. Knowing the goal in advance will save a great deal of time.

Setup Considerations
Before beginning to measure a part, ensure that the device can reach all the
features to be measured. This can eliminate device movements due to the
inability to reach features.

Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment


The coordinate system and alignment created will depend on the purpose for
measuring the part and the amount of data available. The two most commonly
used alignment options are (1) a CAD=Part type alignment to a constructed
coordinate system, and (2) an Iterative alignment. Following are some
examples of when one method may be preferred to another.

1 Coordinate System / CAD = Part.

• The part requires a specific set of datums be followed.

• The objective is to trouble-shoot the part.

2 Iterative.

• For use if there is no clear datum scheme.

• The datum scheme allows for a best fit.

• If a Coordinate System/CAD=Part approach shows the part to be


slightly out of specification. In such a case, it is possible a best fit
alignment will show the part to be within specification.

111
Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Always set the alignment as soon as possible during a measurement session.


Many commands depend upon the alignment to operate correctly.

Save the file as soon as the alignment is complete. If anything goes wrong,
reopen the file with the saved alignment. Continue to save frequently.

Data Collection
Although it is probably more efficient to perform the measurements,
constructions, and dimensions first, then add nominals at a later time, it is not
very practical.

With large parts, it is best to break up the work session into smaller sections.
Within each section, perform the measurements within that area and assign
their nominals. Follow with the constructions and dimensions, and add their
nominals. When each section is done, save the file then move onto the next
section.

This process will help prevent confusion with lists of features. All the data in
the database will be grouped in the area in which the measurements were
taken.

Data Output
Know what sort of output data is expected from the part, IGES data, graphical
report, text report, etc.

Remember that printed reports will always be printed in the current coordinate
system. If there are multiple coordinate systems, make sure the correct
coordinate system is set active before printing.

When exporting CAD data, always complete the CAD = PART alignment
command. The data will always be exported in the World Coordinate System.
A file without a CAD to Part type alignment will not produce the expected
results when the data is imported into another system.

Other Hints
Holes: If features are not on the same plane, modify the AUTO PLANE SELECT
preference and choose define. The MEASURE < CIRCLE command will
prompt you to measure a plane before each circle. This preferences sets all
other 2D commands to work in the same manner.

Surfaces: Choose Select Nominal Surfaces Only in the Auto Nominal


Association part preference. This will automatically select the nearest
Nominal surface for inspection and not any previously measured features.

112
Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Clearing up the view: To clear up the graphics screen:

• Choose VIEW < LAYERS. Entities may be moved from one layer to
another. Also, filters may be created and activated to group and sort several
layers at once. To clean up the display, filter out those layers you do not
wish to view.

• Choose VIEW < ARRANGE LABELS to automatically arrange the on-


screen labels. To hide all labels, choose VIEW < PROPERTIES and click
the VISUAL OBJECTS tab. Clear the MAIN LABEL VIEW check box and
click APPLY.

• Pin or unpin the control bars. Unpin the control bars to minimize them and
enlarge the graphics field. When needed, click the icon and the control bar
will “fly out” for use. Pin the control bars to anchor them for constant view.

113
Chapter 14: Tips and Tricks
Advanced Topics
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 15: Checking a Part with


CAD
• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to use
CAD as nominals and establish alignments. CAM2 SPC
Graph will be used to create a graphical report. After
completing this section, the student will learn how to use
CAD as nominals and generate graphical reports.

Why Work with CAD?


CAM2 Measure X makes it easy to use CAD as nominals for measurement.

CAD Terminology
Types of CAD Data
Wireframe: These entities define the outline of a part. They can include
points, circles, arcs, lines, polylines, and splines. A polyline is a bunch of line
segments stitched together to approximate a curve. A spline is simple curve.

Surface: A surface is used to define the outer boundary of a part. Surfaces are
typically used to define the geometry of complex curved parts, such as
automotive and aerospace sheet metal parts. Surfaces are very popular for
creating cutting paths for CNC cutting tools.

Solid: A solid model is also used to define the outer boundary of a part, but
solids have a thickness or mass. Solid modeling is popular for the design of a
variety of parts. Many CAD systems start with a solid model then create the 2D
drawings and 3D surfaces from the solid.

117
Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Standard CAD Data File Formats


The following CAD data file formats are included with CAM2 Measure X.
Translators for other CAD data file formats are available and must be
purchased from FARO.

IGES

IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Standard) was created to standardize data


transfer between different CAD systems. IGES works very well for surface and
wireframe entities, but not for text and dimensions.

3DM

3DM is the native file format for Rhinoceros® software (Rhino 3D). Rhino can
create, edit, analyze, and translate NURBS curves, surfaces, and solids.
Supported formats include DWG/DXF, SAT (ACIS), X_T (Parasolid), STEP,
VDA and IGES among others.

VDA

VDA is similar to IGES in that it is a standard used to translate data between


different CAD systems. VDA is particularly prevalent in Europe.

118
Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measurement Template
The Measurement Template command provides a quick method to create
nominals, assign nominals, and guide you in the measurement of the part. You
can run the Measurement Template command any time during the
measurement process, but its primary function is to save time in the
preliminary measurement and alignment tasks.

NOTE: A CAD file is not required to run the MEASUREMENT


TEMPLATE command.

Iterative Alignment (Best Fit)


The ITERATIVE alignment command allows the use of several point-
reducible features to best-fit them to their corresponding nominal values.

1
3
7
M
5

1
7

3
5

FIGURE 15-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data

119
Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

M
1
7

3
5

FIGURE 15-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data


Unlike CAD=PART, ITERATIVE does not require a constructed coordinate
system. CAM2 Measure X will use the coordinate system defined in the CAD
model.

Automatic Nominal Association


After a CAD to Part alignment is complete, CAM2 Measure X will
automatically look for the nearest nominal feature and associate it to the
current measurement. Auto Nominal is an option in PREFERENCES. The
default setting is ON when CAM2 Measure X is installed.

NOTE: Changing the label of the measured feature in the RESULTS dialog
box will change the label of any nominal that has been automatically
associated.

Important Topics - Checking a Part With


CAD
• CAD files can be translated though IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and v5,
Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and
OpenNURBS formats.

• Always add CAD data before measuring.

• At least 3 point reducible features are required for the ITERATIVE


ALIGNMENT command.

120
Chapter 15: Checking a Part with CAD
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 16: Checking a Part with


CAD Practical
Practical Exercise
Use a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features,
complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, modify the on-screen
labels, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of
your work.

Translating an IGES File


Always translate, and add CAD data to the drawing file before doing any
measurements. If the features are measured first and then the CAD data is
added, the results may be poor because the CAD data and measurements may
not align properly.

1
C P3 8 2 P4 D
9
10
F 7 3

A 4 B
P1 6 P2

FIGURE 16-1 FARO Demonstration Part

121
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-2 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 16-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK.

122
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 16-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 16-5 Adding CAD Parts

123
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the
ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 16-6 FARO_Demo_Part1 CAD file

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X can translate the IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and
v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and
OpenNURBS formats.

Measuring the Alignment Features


Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement
Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD
model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you
though the measurement of the three circles.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select


Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 16-7 Measurement Template

124
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 1 on
the CAD model using
the mouse.

FIGURE 16-8 Circle 1

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1 highlights red.

FIGURE 16-9 Circle 1 Results

4 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 3 on
the CAD model using
the mouse.

FIGURE 16-10 Circle 3

125
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1 and Circle 3 highlights
red.

FIGURE 16-11 Circle 3 Results

6 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 7 on
the CAD model using
the mouse.

FIGURE 16-12 Circle 7

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE007.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1, Circle 3 and Circle 7
highlights red.

FIGURE 16-13 Circle 7 Results

126
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and
return to the Measurment Template.

FIGURE 16-14 Measurement Template

9 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not
been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to define a plane during a 2D
feature command.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 16-15 Select Plane

127
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

11 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 16-16 Measure XY Plane

12 ❑ Measure circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 16-17 Measure Circle 1

13 ❑ Take a look at the results and click OK to continue.

14 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 16-18 Select Plane

128
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 16-19 Measure Circle 3

16 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 16-20 Select Plane

17 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 16-21 Measure Circle 7

129
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 16-22 Measurement Results

Setting an Iterative Alignment


1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001,


M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007.
• Set Weights = unchecked.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-23 Iterative Alignment

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time
results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command
will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change.

130
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Check the MAX ERROR of the


Iterative Alignment. For this part
the value should be in tolerance.
• Notice the error between each of the
measured circles and its associated
nominal.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 16-24 Iterative Alignment Results

Save The Measurements


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Cad to Part.


• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X
Document (*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 16-25 Save As

Measure the Remaining Features


Now that the part has been aligned to the CAD data, continue to measure the
remaining features on the part. Notice that when measuring features, a
representation of the probe on the screen that shows the current location of the
probe.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

131
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 16-26 Select Plane

NOTE: All of the circles on this part are in the same plane, therefore any of
the circles can be selected as the plane for the next measured circle.

3 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 16-27 Measure Circle 5

Notice that there is more information in the RESULTS dialog box for each
measured circle. After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2
Measure X automatically searches for a nominal for each measured feature. If
a nominal is found, it is automatically associated to the measured feature. You
will the see the comparison between the measured and nominal features.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 16-28 Circle 5 Results

132
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Modifying On-Screen Labels


Take a look at the screen. Before running the REVIEW FEATURES command
to print a report, add more information to the on-screen labels and arrange the
labels in the graphics field.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Choose each of the measured circles. Hold down CTRL key and click
the left mouse button to pick each circle.

3 ❑ Click on the LABELS tab.

4 ❑ Select the Tolerance Bar, Actual, Nominal, and Deviation check boxes.
Notice that the labels in the Preview window are updating.

FIGURE 16-29 Labels tabs

5 ❑ Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box. Now, arrange the
labels around the part.

6 ❑ Press the L hot key to automatically arrange the labels around the
graphics filed.

7 ❑ Use the mouse and drag, left mouse click and hold, any of the
on-screen labels to another area of the graphics filed and release the
mouse button to finish.

133
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = CAD to Part.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-30 Enter Header Information

134
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = unchecked.
NOTE: Since you manually arranged
the on-screen labels, make sure that
this check box is cleared.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features that are “On” the report
will have a check mark in the ON/OFF
column. To add or remove features
from the report, click the check box to
the left of the feature.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 16-31 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in
Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

135
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename = CAD
to Part.
• Save as type =
MHTML Files
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 16-32 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the
SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name,
select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

136
Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 17: Surface Measurement


• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to inspect
a part with points. After this section, the student will be able
to align a CAD model and compare any point on a part to a
CAD surface. They will also be able to learn how to check a
specific XYZ coordinate and compare it to the nominal.

Why Measure a Surface?


There are two major reasons to measure curved surfaces: to see if the shape of
the part is correct, or to see if a component is located correctly in an assembly.

Tools and fixtures may be measured to compare them to the nominal CAD
surfaces of the part. This often helps to identify problems in manufacturing
when trying to determine if a tool is the source of a problem or if the
component is out of specification.

Surface Measurement Commands


Inspect Surface
This is the easiest way to measure a surface. After selecting the INSPECT
SURFACE command, place the probe on the part, press the FRONT button,
pull back, and press the BACK button. CAM2 Measure X will compare the
measured point to the surface.

Surface Edge Point


This point checks the trim edge of a part to the edge of a CAD surface. After
selecting the SURFACE EDGE POINT command, place the probe on the part,
press the FRONT button, pull back and press the BACK button. CAM2
Measure X will compare the measured point to the surface edge.

Surface Point
If a CAD surface is not available and you need to measure a point on a surface,
use the SURFACE POINT command. After selecting the SURFACE POINT
command, measure three or more points in a small triangular pattern, then pull
off the surface and press the BACK button. The points are used to determine
the surface normal vector, which is then used for probe compensation. This
results in an XYZ point with an IJK vector.

137
Chapter 17: Surface Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Home In Point
To measure a surface at a specific location, use the HOME IN command. This
is one of the more complex functions within CAM2 Measure X, but it is
extremely useful when checking tools, jigs, and fixtures.

There is a small question of probe compensation. CAM2 Measure X provides


three different probe compensation options.

• Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known).

• Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface.


This direction is the normal vector of the surface at the XYZ point
location.

• Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by


measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a mini-
plane (FRONT button) and one compensation point (BACK button).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option
2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3.

Since it is very difficult to move the probe to an exact XYZ location, the
HOME IN command requires a HOME IN ZONE or diameter. The home in zone
allows you to take a point within a cylindrical area around the point.

Important Topics - Surface Measurement


• The two reasons to check a surface:

1 To see if the shape of the part is correct.

2 To see if a component is located correctly in a assembly.

• The three options for the probe compensation vector are:

1 Key In
2 Select Surface
3 Sample Surface

138
Chapter 17: Surface Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Instructors


Practical Comments

Practical Exercise
Use a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features and
construct a measured coordinate system, complete an alignment, check a few
surfaces by measuring surface points, create and save an inspection report, and
save the measurement file of your work.

S1

S2

FIGURE 18-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

Translating and Adding the CAD data


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

139
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-2 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 18-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK.

140
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Filename = Bracket1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 18-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Filename = Bracket1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 18-5 Adding CAD Parts

141
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the
ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 18-6 Bracket1 CAD file

Measuring and Creating an Alignment


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 18-7 Measure XY Plane

142
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button to
reject. Then re-measure
the plane.

FIGURE 18-8 Plane Results

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 18-9 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure the line.

• Take the three or four


points from the S1 end
towards S2 by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK
button.
S2

FIGURE 18-10 Measure Line 1

143
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button to
reject. Then re-measure
the line.

FIGURE 18-11 Line Results

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

• Take the three or four


points along the S1 edge by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK
button.
S2

FIGURE 18-12 Measure Line 2

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE002.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button to
reject. Then re-measure
the line.

FIGURE 18-13 Line Results

144
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 18-14 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

A plane and two lines can be used to construct a Line/Line Intersection


coordinate system.

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


LINE/LINE.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.
• Select a Line = M_LINE002.
• Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-15 Line/Line Coordinate System

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

145
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

CAD=Part
1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 18-16 CAD=Part Alignment

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

FIGURE 18-17 Aligned to CAD Model

Save the Measurements


This was a lot of work, save the file.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

146
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Surface


Measurement.
• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X
Document (*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 18-18 Save As

147
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Checking a Surface
After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2 Measure X will try
to associate the closest nominal feature to any measurement. For Surface point
measurements the default preferences are to select all surfaces both measured
and nominal. Since this CAD model is complete, changing this surface option
to ignore the measured surfaces will make the measuring process easier.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

• Automatically Associate
Nominals = checked (or
On).
• Features:

• Nominal Feature
Search Radius = 5.0.

• Display Nominal
Result = unchecked
(or Off).
• Surfaces = Select Nominal Surfaces Only.
FIGURE 18-19 Auto Nominal Association

3 ❑ Click OK.

Inspect the surfaces of the CAD model.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

• Move the probe


close to the part; the
nearest surface will
turn red.
• Press the FRONT
button to measure,
pull the probe away
from the surface,
and press the BACK
button.
FIGURE 18-20 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

148
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The results displayed are


the X,Y, Z, and the distance
to the surface.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-21 Inspect Surface Point Results

6 ❑ Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

Checking an Edge
Since we are checking an edge there will be 3 surfaces within the Auto
Nominal zone (top, bottom and side). The Auto Nominal function may not
select the correct surface. By turning off the Auto Nominal and selecting the
surface manually the correct surface can be selected.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

• Automatically Associate
Nominals = clear (or Off).

FIGURE 18-22 Auto Nominal Association

3 ❑ Click OK.

149
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE EDGE


POINT.

• Using the mouse, left


mouse click to select the
upper surface.

NOTE: A drop-down menu


will appear listing all the S1
surfaces and curves near the
area selected. As you scroll
down the drop down list, S2
the surface or curve will
highlight red.
• Left click to chose the
appropriate surface or
curve.
FIGURE 18-23 Select the Surface

5 ❑ Measure the point.

• Place the probe on


the edge of the part
near the red surface.
• Press the FRONT
button to measure,
pull the probe away
from the surface,
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 18-24 Measuring a Surface Edge Point

150
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The results displayed are


the X,Y, Z, and the 3D
deviation to the surface.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-25 Surface Edge Point Results

7 ❑ Measure some more surface edges.

Using Home In Points


For this example, construct a few nominal points.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES.


Use the following values:

X Y Z

Point 1 55.0 36.5 41.0


Point 2 95.0 36.5 41.0
Point 3 135.0 36.5 41.0

• Enter the nominal information from the table


above.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK to create the point
• Click OK to accept the nominal results.
• Repeat the command for each point.

FIGURE 18-26 Construct Point Enter Values

Measure Point 1 using the Home In command and an entered (key in) vector.

151
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

• Click the ADD button.


• Coordinate = N_POINT001. Use the
COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM
SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = KEY IN.


• Approach Vector: I=0, J=-1, K=0
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Home-In Zone = 1.0.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box
and begin measuring.
FIGURE 18-27 Create Home In Point

3 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow the on-screen guide to the point.

• Press the FRONT button,


to measure when the probe
is in the zone.
• Notice the measurements
and the comparison to the
nominal point in the
RESULTS dialog box.
• Click OK to accept the
point.

FIGURE 18-28 Home-in Results

Measure Point 2 using the Home In command and sample the surface to
determine the vector for compensation.

NOTE: For this option the approach vector will be different than the
compensation vector. The approach will be set along the direction of the
current view.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

• Click the ADD button.


FIGURE 18-29 Create Home In Point

152
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• Coordinate = N_POINT002. Use the


COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM
SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE.


• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Home-In Zone = 1.0.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box
and begin measuring.

FIGURE 18-29 Create Home In Point

5 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow on-screen guide to an enlarged
home-in zone. Measure three points by pressing the FRONT button.

6 ❑ Use a triangular pattern just as measuring a surface point. This will


determine the compensation vector.

• Pull back and press the BACK button to define the compensation
vector direction.

7 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow the guide to the point.

• Press the FRONT button,


to measure when in the
zone.
• Notice the measurements
and the comparison to the
nominal point in the
RESULTS dialog box.
• Click OK to accept the
point.

FIGURE 18-30 Home-in Results

Measure Point 3 using the Home In command and select the surface to
determine the vector for probe compensation.

153
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

• Click the ADD button.


• Coordinate = N_POINT003. Use the
COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM
SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE.


• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Home-In Zone = 1.0.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box
and begin measuring.

FIGURE 18-31 Create Home In Point

9 ❑ Take a look at the Output Bar. CAM2 Measure X is prompting to select


a surface.

• Left mouse click on the


top surface near the point.
• Select the correct Surface.

FIGURE 18-32 Select a Surface

154
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow on-screen guide to the point.

• Press the FRONT button,


to measure when in the
zone.
• Pull back from the surface
and Press the BACK
button for compensation.
• Notice the measurements
and the comparison to the
nominal surface in the
RESULTS dialog box.
• Click OK to accept the
point.
FIGURE 18-33 Home-in Results

155
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Surface
Measurement.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 18-34 Enter Header Information

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features that are “On” the report
will have a check mark in the ON/OFF
column. To add or remove features
from the report, click the check box to
the left of the feature.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 18-35 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in
Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

156
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• File name =
Surface
Measurement.
• Save as type =
MHTML Files
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 18-36 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the
SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name,
select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

157
Chapter 18: Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 19: Scanning and


Comparing to CAD Practical
Practical Exercise
Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of
the plate will be your base plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-
axis and origin, respectively.

S1

S2

FIGURE 19-1 Faro Demonstration Bracket

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-2 Drawing Units

159
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 19-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

160
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
Bracket1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-5 Adding CAD Parts

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD
model in the screen.

FIGURE 19-6 Bracket 1.igs file

Measuring and Creating an Alignment


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

161
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 19-7 Measure XY Plane

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button to
accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good, press
the BACK button to reject.
Then re-measure the fea-
ture.

FIGURE 19-8 Plane Results

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are pro-
jected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 19-9 Select Plane

162
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008
6 ❑ Measure the line.

• Take the three or four


points from the S1 end
towards S2 by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK but-
ton.
S2

FIGURE 19-10 Measure Line 1

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 19-11 Line Results

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

• Take the three or four


points on the S1 edge by
pressing the FRONT but-
ton.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK but-
ton.
S2

FIGURE 19-12 Measure Line 2

163
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE002.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 19-13 Line Results

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


LINE/LINE.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.
• Select a Line = M_LINE002.
• Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-14 Line/Line coordinate system

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

164
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

CAD=Part
1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 19-15 CAD=Part Alignment

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

4 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

• File name = Surface Profile.


• Save as type = CAM2 Measure
(*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 19-16 Save As

165
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Scan Measurement Preference


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

• Type of Scanning = Start/


Pause Scan With Trigger.
• Maximum Distance =
1000000000000.
• Minimum Distance =
2.0.

FIGURE 19-17 Feature Scanning

3 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, select MISCELLANEOUS.

• Save Scan Lines as Fea-


tures = Yes.

FIGURE 19-18 Feature Scanning

4 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

166
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Parallel Lock Planes


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK
PLANES.

• Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in).


• Number of Planes = 100.
• Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in).
• Save As = Open Polylines.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 19-19 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001.


• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-20 Select Plane

3 ❑ Scan the surface.

• Press the FRONT button to


begin scanning.
• Move the probe across the
surface contour.
• Press the FRONT button to
pause the scan.
• Press the BACK button to
end the scan.

FIGURE 19-21 Parallel Locked Scanning

NOTE: Scan one surface at a time.

167
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

• To keep the scan data, press the FRONT


button.
• To discard the scan data, press the
BACK button.
FIGURE 19-22 Keep Data?

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the polyline results.

Show Surface Deviation


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select the M_SURFACE###-### polyline features.

• Readings =
checked.
• Whiskers =
checked.

FIGURE 19-23 Surface Whiskers

3 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Rescale Whiskers
The whiskers will now give a graphical display of deviation to the CAD
surface. A green whisker shows a deviation less than the tolerance. A yellow
whisker shows deviation greater than seventy-five percent of the tolerance. A
red whisker shows a deviation greater than the tolerance.

1 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > DECREASE. This will
reduce the whisker length.

2 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > INCREASE. This will
increase the whisker length.

168
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Rescale the Whiskers on the part to best view the deviation.

FIGURE 19-24 Whiskers

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Surface Pro-
file.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-25 Enter Header Information

169
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST dialog box shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• Select all M_SURFACE###-### fea-
tures. All other features unchecked.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 19-26 Report List

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW dialog box shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename = Sur-
face Profile.
• Save as type =
MHTML File
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 19-27 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit the REPORT PREVIEW dialog box.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

170
Chapter 19: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Point Measurement


• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use
points for inspection. After completing this section, the
student will be able to use the surface point commands to
inspect parts.

Point Measurements
Comp Off and Comp Axis
Comp Off points do not compensate. The point will be taken at the center of
the probe. These points are idea for use in all Device Position commands and
to check movement in the part or measurement device. Comp Axis points will
compensate along a coordinate axis, so they may only be used to measure
surfaces that are parallel to the coordinate planes: XY, YZ, and XZ. the
BACK button must be pressed after pulling away perpendicular to the
coordinate plane the point will compensate towards.

High Point and Low Point


These commands will find the point furthest (High Point) or nearest (Low
Point) to a Plane, Line, or Point. When the Scan Measurement Part Preference
is On, these commands capture points as it receives them from the
measurement device.

Surface Measurements
If the surface is not parallel to a coordinate plane, the Surface Point
command must be used. This command uses three or more measured points
and a compensation point to calculate a single point on a small planar surface.
Probe Center
XYZ to be
inspected

How do we determine the


vector?
Surface

171
Chapter 20: Point Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

The Home in command guides the measurement device to a specific XYZ


location to measure a point.
Home In Zone (diameter)
Home In Vector

Final
Compensated
Point

CAM2 Measure X provides three different probe compensation options for the
Home in command.

• Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known).

• Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface.


This direction is the normal vector of the surface, at the XYZ point
location.

• Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by


measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a mini-
plane (FRONT button) and one compensation point (BACK button).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option
2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3.

Since it is very difficult to move the probe to an exact XYZ location, the Home
In command requires a Home In Zone. The surface you are measuring should
approximate a flat plane within the Home In zone. If the surface is curved,
your measurement may include cosine error.
Home In Vector

Measured point
R
Zo

with error
ne
R

e
ur
Zo

at
ne

rv
Cu
R Surface

172
Chapter 20: Point Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

To calculate the maximum Home In Zone, use the following equation:


R Zone:= R Curvature 2 _
(R Curvature _ ErrorCosine)2

Enter the maximum acceptable cosine error and the radius of curvature of the
surface and get the maximum allowable Home In Zone radius. Usually, the
cosine error will be much smaller than the accuracy of the measurement
device.

Checking the Same Points on Another Part

The list of points in the Home In command may be saved to file. CAM2
Measure X creates an ASCII text file with all the data. The Home In command
can import the file to check the same location on another similar part. The
Home In file has the extension *.hmi.

The Home In command also saves and imports the ACL format (GOTO/ X, Y,
Z, I, J, K). The ACL file has the extension *.acl.

Important Topics - Point Measurement


• Home In Point files (*.hmi) allow you to save a series of home-in
points to be saved for use in other measurement sessions.

• The Select Surface Home In option requires a CAD surface.

173
Chapter 20: Point Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measurement


Practical
PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 21-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

175
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 21-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
Bracket1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 21-4 Adding CAD Parts

176
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD
model in the screen.

FIGURE 21-5 Bracket 1.igs file

Measuring the Alignment Features


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 21-6 Measure XY Plane

177
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-7 Plane Results

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 21-8 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure the line.

• Take the three or four


points from the S1 end
towards S2 by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK but-
ton.
S2

FIGURE 21-9 Measure Line 1

178
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-10 Line Results

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

• Take the three or four


points along the S1 edge by
pressing the FRONT but-
ton.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK but-
ton.
S2

FIGURE 21-11 Measure Line 2

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE002.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-12 Line Results

179
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 21-13 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

Constructing the Alignment


The correct amount of measured features for a Line/Line Intersection
coordinate system has been measured. These features are a measured match for
the nominal coordinate system.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


LINE/LINE.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.
• Select a Line = M_LINE002.
• Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 21-14 Line/Line Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

180
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 21-15 CAD=Part Alignment

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

FIGURE 21-16 Aligned to CAD Model

High Points
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

181
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

• Type of Scanning =
Start/Pause Scan
With Trigger
• Maximum Distance =
1000000000000.
• Minimum Distance =
0.0.

FIGURE 21-17 Scan Measurement Preference

3 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

NOTE: The SCAN MEASUREMENT may be turned on or off using the X


key on the keyboard.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HIGH POINT.

• Select a Feature = M_PLANE001.


• Feature Type = Plane Reducible.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-18 Select Feature

5 ❑ Place the probe on the top of the sphere.

• Press the FRONT but-


ton and scan over the
top of the surface.
• Press the FRONT but-
ton to pause the scan.
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the
BACK button.
FIGURE 21-19 Measure High Point

182
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the
results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then re-measure the fea-
ture.
FIGURE 21-20 Point Results

Home-in Options
Before using the Home-in function to inspect points, create some of the
nominal points that will be checked.

Label X Y Z

HMI_1 55.00 36.50 41.00


HMI_2 55.00 49.00 66.20
HMI_3 55.00 25.00 14.49

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES.

• Enter the nominal information from the table


above.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Choose the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK to create the point

FIGURE 21-21 Construct Point Enter Values

183
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = see table.


• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 21-22 Point Results

3 ❑ Repeat these steps for each point.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

5 ❑ From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

• Type of Scanning = No
Scanning.

FIGURE 21-23 Scan Measurement Preference

6 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K


1 ❑ From MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

184
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_HMI_1.
• Approach Vector: I = 0, J = -1, K =
0.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Rotation Angle = 0.
• Home-In Zone = 1.0.
• Approach Vector = KEY IN.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 21-24 Create Home In Point

NOTE: The approach vector is 0,-1,0. This is known because of the


orientation of the part. The approach is from the negative Y direction, so a
negative J value is used. Note how only the Y value will change when the
point is measured.

185
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Three Coordinates, Select Surface


1 ❑ Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_HMI_2.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Rotation Angle = 0.
• Home-In Zone = 1.0.
• Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-25 Create Home In Point

NOTE: The approach vector will be extracted from the surface, normal to
the surface at the location of the nominal point.

Three Coordinates, Sample Surface


1 ❑ Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_HMI_3.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Rotation Angle = 0.
• Home-In Zone = 1.0.
• Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 21-26 Create Home In Point

NOTE: The approach vector is calculated from the small sampled plane
that is digitized within a enlarged Home In Zone. This method should be
used in the absence of CAD surfaces.

Save the Home In File


Before measuring the Home In Points, save the points to a file that may be
imported directly into the Home In command later. This is an excellent way of
taking point and vector data on one part and then using the XYZ, IJK data to
inspect another part using the Home In format.

186
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

1 ❑ Click the EXPORT FILE button.

• File name = your initials -


Home In.
• Save as Type = Home In Files
(*.hmi).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 21-27 Save HIM file.

Measure the Home In Points


1 ❑ Click the OK button in the HOME IN POINT dialog box to start
measuring the three points.

2 ❑ Measure HMI_1.

NOTE: One measurement point is required to capture the point. The


measured point will be offset for the radius of the probe along the surface
vector that was entered.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = HMI_1.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-28 Point Results

187
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure is prompting the operator to select a surface of HMI_2.

• Using the mouse click on


the top surface.
• Select the face on the outer
surface of the part.
S1

S2

FIGURE 21-29 Select Surface

5 ❑ Measure HMI_2.

NOTE: One measurement point and one compensation point is required to


capture the point. The compensation point is required to determine which
side of the CAD surface the point was measured.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = HMI_2.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-30 Point Results

7 ❑ Measure HMI_3.

NOTE: Four measurement points and one compensation point are required
to capture the point. The first three measurement and compensation points
are used to determine the surface vector. The last measurement point is
used to capture the point.

188
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = HMI_3.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button but-
ton twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 21-31 Point Results

189
Chapter 21: Point Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Sheet Metal


Measurement
Sheet Metal Measurements
• OBJECTIVE: To understand how sheet metal
measurements differ from regular measurement types. The
student will learn techniques on how to measure sheet
metal trim lines.

Simple Features

Sheet metal measurements are very similar to ordinary measurements. Arcs,


circles, 2D lines, and slots are measured with the same method as
normal measurements, with the exception of adding a material thickness.

The reason for material thickness is due


to the difficulty keeping the probe on the
Radius for Compensation
edge of a very thin piece of sheet metal.
Falling off the edge of the sheet metal Material Edge
would cause an incorrect value for
feature size and incorrect position.
Probe Equator
Ball Probe
CAM2 Measure X compensates for the
possibility of falling off the edge with simple geometry functions using the
measured plane of projection and the thickness value entered for the material.

Unique Sheet Metal Measurements


There are two specific sheet metal measurements: Edge Point and Hemmed
Edge Point.

The Trimmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on the sheet metal
edge, which may then be compared to a nominal line or curve representing the
nominal edge.

The Hemmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on a hemmed


edge. A hemmed edge is one piece of sheet metal folded over the end of
another piece of sheet metal, like on the edge of a car door.

191
Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Both the Trimmed Edge and the Hemmed Edge points require a sheet metal
thickness value. Both are measured by digitizing three points near the edge, in
a small plane, and two points on the edge, next to the plane. The resulting
point compensates for the probe and the sheet metal thickness and calculates a
point.

Surface Points
Sheet metal parts may also be measured using the surface point commands,
Home In, Inspect Surface, and Surface Point. Since these commands are not
specific to sheet metal measurements, the material thickness must be activated
manually. The M hot key displays the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog box while
any sheet metal command is active. Material Thickness may also be set in
preferences. Only sheet metal commands will use the material thickness value.

CAD Side and Other Side

There are situations with many sheet metal parts where the nominal point is on
the other side of the sheet metal surface. Since the material thickness is
constant throughout the part, CAM2 Measure allows the measurement of a
sheet metal part from the other side.

This setting is all about what side of the part that is being touched with the
probe, the CAD SIDE, or the OTHER SIDE.

CAD Side

Other Side
(Nominal)

FIGURE 22-1 Other Side

192
Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Dynamic Nominals
With CAM2 Measure X, any type of nominal feature may be associated to any
type of measured feature. This is called Dynamic Nominals. For Example:

Nominal Line

Measured
Circle

FIGURE 22-2 Dynamic Nominals

Measured circles may use a nominal line to compare X, Y and Z values. The
nominal line does not contain a diameter. CAM2 Measure will deactivate the
diameter tolerance.

Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture


Measurement
• It is important to enter the correct material thickness for sheet metal
measurements.

• For Inspect Surface points to compensate through the material, the


OTHER SIDE Sheet Metal option will be selected.

• Dynamic nominals will not auto-nominal. They must associated


manually.

193
Chapter 22: Sheet Metal Measurement
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and


Surface Measurement Practical
PRACTICAL EXERCISE
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 23-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click MATERIAL.

• Material Compensation =
checked.
• Direction = CAD Side.
• Thickness = Single.
• Material Thickness =
3.175.

FIGURE 23-3 Material Compensation

195
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename = Shell1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 23-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
Shell1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 23-5 Adding CAD Parts

196
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in
the screen (or press the 7 key).

FIGURE 23-6 Shell1.igs

Constructing Nominals
10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of
the part.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 23-7 Construct P1

197
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = P1.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 23-8 Circle Results

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of
the part.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 23-9 Construct P2

198
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = P2.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 23-10 Circle Results

14 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Using the mouse click 3
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of
the part.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 23-11 Construct P3

199
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = P3.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 23-12 Circle Results

Using the Measurement Template


16 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

• Click the FROM SCREEN button .

• Using the mouse, select the 3 nominal circles


P1, P2, and P3.
• Click the right mouse button to return to the
MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog.
• Change the MEASURE AS drop downs
from CIRCLE to PLNPNT (Planar Point).
FIGURE 23-13 Measurement Template

17 ❑ Click OK in the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog to measure the three


circles.

18 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 23-14 Select Plane

200
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

19 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-15 Measure XY Plane

20 ❑ Measure P1.

• Take one or two points


in the hole by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-16 Measure P1

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

22 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 23-17 Select Plane

201
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

23 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-18 Measure XY Plane

24 ❑ Measure P2.

• Take one or two points


in the hole by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-19 Measure P2

25 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

26 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 23-20 Select Plane

202
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

27 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-21 Measure XY Plane

28 ❑ Measure P3.

• Take one or two points


in the hole by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-22 Measure P3

29 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

Iterative Alignment
1 ❑ Fom the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Select M_P1, M_P2 and M_P3.


• Set Weights = unchecked.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 23-23 Iterative Alignment

203
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Compare to Straight Nominal Edge


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a line with 2
points.
• Use the mouse to click 2
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points right.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 23-24 Construct Nominal Line

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• Click OK to accept the
line.

FIGURE 23-25 Line Results

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < TRIMMED


POINT.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same


values entered earlier.

204
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 23-26 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the shell.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the shell by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-27 Measure Plane

7 ❑ Measure the edge.

• Take two or three points


on the edge by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Pull away from the edge
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-28 Construct Nominal Line

205
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Select Nominal =
N_LINE001.

FIGURE 23-29 Trimmed Point Results

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab and view the results.

FIGURE 23-30 Trimmed Point Results

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

206
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compare Nominal Circles


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of
the part.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 23-31 Construct Circle 13

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE_13.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 23-32 Circle Results

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < CIRCLE.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same


values entered earlier.

207
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 23-33 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the side of the shell.

• Take four or five points


on the side of the shell
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-34 Measure Plane

7 ❑ Measure the circle.

• Take three or four


points on the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the circle and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 23-35 Measure Circle

208
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Select Nominal =
N_CIRCLE_13.

FIGURE 23-36 Measured Circle Results

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab to view the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Compare Nominal Round Slots


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select ROUND SLOT < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 6
points (or 2 circles with
3 points each).
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of
the part.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points to the
right.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 23-37 Construct Slot F

209
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SLOT_F.
• Click OK to accept the
slot.

FIGURE 23-38 Round Slot Results

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < ROUND SLOT.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same


values entered earlier.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 23-39 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the shell.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the shell by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 23-40 Measure Plane

210
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Measure the slot.

• Take three or four


points on the first end of
the slot by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull to the center of the
arc and press the BACK
button.

• Take three or four points on the second end of the slot by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull to the center of the arc and press the BACK button.
FIGURE 23-41 Measure Round Slot

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Select Nominal =
N_SLOT_F.

FIGURE 23-42 Round Slot Results

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab to view the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the slot.

211
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Compare Nominal Surfaces


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

2 ❑ Click the M hot key on the keyboard to bring up the Material Thickness
dialog box.

• Material Compensation =
checked.
• Direction = Other Side.
• Thickness = Single.
• Material Thickness =
3.175.

FIGURE 23-43 Material Compensation

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the material thickness.

4 ❑ Measure a point on the opposite side of the material.

• Move the probe to the


underside of the part.
When the surface turns
red click the FRONT
button
• Pull away from the sur-
face and click the
BACK button.

FIGURE 23-44

Note: Even though you took the point on the opposite side of the part
CAM2 Measure compensated the extra amount for the material.

212
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFACE001.

FIGURE 23-45 Inspect Surface Results

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

213
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

214
Chapter 23: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Round Tubing Instructors


Comments
• Objective - The instructor will introduce the tube
measurement routines in CAM2 Measure. Upon completion Enter
of this section, the student will be able to measure tubes,
construct nominal tubes, and generate an inspection report. Comments Here
Tubing Part Preferences

FIGURE 24-1 Tubing Preferences

Tubing Turn Direction - Clockwise or Counterclockwise. This preference


will be based upon the tube-bending machine. When the machine turns the
tube it may be rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise (default) direction.
Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and
measurement report.

Tubing Turn Angle - Relative or Absolute. This preference will be based


upon the bending machine. When the machine bends the angle the bend is
referenced to the first segment (absolute) or to the last segment (relative -
default). Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and
measurement report.

Break Point Type - Intersection or Segment End. This preference will


construct the intersection points from the intersection of the cylinder segments
(Intersection - default) or the intersections of the cylinders with the toroid
(Segment End).

Measure Tube Bends - All Bends or Required Bends. This preference


determines if the toroid of the tube will be measured. When set to All Bends,
you will measure the cylinders and bends. When set to Required Bends
(default), only bend angles of 180 degrees will be measured.

215
Chapter 24: Round Tubing
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measure Tube
Round Tube
The MEASURE ROUND TUBE command links a series of plane, cylinder
and torus commands to construct a single round tube. End B is the first feature
to be measured and will be measured as a plane. End A is the last feature to be
measured and is also measured as a plane.

Rectangular Tube
The MEASURE RECTANGULAR TUBE command links a series of plane
commands together to construct a single rectangular tube.

Tube Fitting
The MEASURE TUBE FITTING command allows you to design a tube by
measuring points in space to define the tube segments. A plane and cylinder at
the ends of the tube is required. The plane and cylinder are used to determine
the starting and ending points of the tube as well as the angle to the surface.

Construct Tube
Enter XYZ
Round

The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube diameter and bend radius of the tube
may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Rectangular

The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube width, tube height, and bend radius of
the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Enter PTB
Round

The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube diameter and bend radius of the tube
may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Rectangular

The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube width, tube height, and bend radius of
the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

216
Chapter 24: Round Tubing
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

From Features
A tube may be constructed from measured, constructed, or nominal geometry.
Two planes, a series of cylinders, and torids are selected to construct a tube.

Breakpoints
The breakpoints of a constructed or nominal tube may be added as separate
features for use in alignment, construction, or dimension commands.

Importing Data
Import CSV

Select a comma-delimited file that contains the XYZ or PTB information for a
tube. This command will populate the list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, or XYZ
value, bend radius and diameter information. The format for this command
should be:

Tube diameter

01, X, Y, Z, 0, 0, 0, 0

02, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius

03, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius

##, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, 0

NOTE: If the CONSTRUCT > TUBE > ENTER XYZ is used, only the X,
Y, Z and Bend Radius information is needed. The PTB fields may be left
blank. The X, Y, Z fields are not required for the ENTER PTB command.

Import BendPro™

Select a tube from the BendPro™ database. This command will populate the
list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, Bend Radius and diameter information that was
used to create the tube.

From Polyline

Select a polyline from the CAD view and the XYZ breakpoint list will be
populated with the vertices of the polyline.

217
Chapter 24: Round Tubing
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Tube Reporting
Tube Correction Report
TubeBendCorrection is a report format specifically designed for calculating
tube spring back. The Pull Turn Bend of the measured tube will be compared
to the Pull Turn Bend of the nominal tube and a correction report will be
generated. The correction report provides you with Pull Turn Bend
information that will output a tube to match the nominal.

Important Topics - Round Tubing


• The Tubing Preferences are based upon the settings of the tube
bending machine.

• The tubing bend radius may be measured for each bend or entered
(default) for the tube. If a bend angle is 180 degrees, you must
measure the bend as a torus.

• The tubing commands may be used in the Learn/Execute program


to create part programs.

218
Chapter 24: Round Tubing
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Instructors


Tube Practical Comments
Enter
Practical Exercise
Comments Here
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 25-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 25-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Measuring a Tube
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will step you through the measurement of a tube by
linking the plane and cylinder commands together.

219
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Measure End B of the tube as a plane.

• Take four or five points


on the front of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 25-3 Measure Plane

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

4 ❑ Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 25-4 Measure First Segment

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

220
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 25-5 Measure Second Segment

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

8 ❑ Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 25-6 Measure Third Segment

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

221
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 25-7 Measure Fourth Segment

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

12 ❑ Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 25-8 Measure Fifth Segment

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

222
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a
cylinder.

14 ❑ Press the BACK button to cancel the cylinder measurment.

• Press the <BACK> == NO button to


confirm that there are no more segments
to measure.
FIGURE 25-9 Last Segment?

15 ❑ Measure End A of the tube as a plane.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 25-10 Measure Plane

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

17 ❑ The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

• Tube Diameter = 6.35.


• Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 25-11 Tube Bend Information

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the tube.

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

223
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Tube Measure-
ment.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 25-12 Enter Header Information

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features are On the report will
have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-
umn. To add or remove features from
the report, click the check box to the left
of the feature.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 25-13 Report List

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

224
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename = Tube
Measurement.
• Save as type =
MHTML File
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 25-14 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

10 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

• File name = Tube Measurement.


• Save as type = CAM2 Measure
(*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 25-15 Save As

225
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

226
Chapter 25: Measuring a Round Tube Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Instructors


Learn/Execute Practical Comments
Enter
Practical Exercise
Comments Here
Preparing the Learn Execute file
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 26-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/
EXECUTE.

227
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the
portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Select CAM2 Measure Learn File


(*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-3 Choose File type

3 ❑ You will see the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This shows you the
instructions the program currently contains.

FIGURE 26-4 Offline Programing Dialog

4 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window.
This will begin the On-Line Learn program.

Constructing a Nominal Tube


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT Menu, select TUBE > ENTER XYZ.

2 ❑ Enter the Tube type and Diameter.

• Select the ROUND toggle button.

• Diameter = 6.35.

228
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Enter the first point.

• X = 0.0.
• Y = 0.0.
• Z = 0.0.
• Bend Radius = 0.0.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-5 Enter Breakpoint

4 ❑ Click the ADD button.

5 ❑ Enter the second point.

• X =25.0.
• Y = 0.0.
• Z = 0.0.
• Bend Radius = 12.7.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-6 Enter Breakpoint

6 ❑ Click the ADD button.

229
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Enter the third point.

• X = 100.0.
• Y = -27.5.
• Z = 12.0.
• Bend Radius = 12.7.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-7 Enter Breakpoint

8 ❑ Click the ADD button.

9 ❑ Enter the fourth point.

• X = 100.0.
• Y = 282.5.
• Z = 12.0.
• Bend Radius = 12.7.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-8 Enter Breakpoint

10 ❑ Click the ADD button.

230
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Enter the fifth point.

• X = 25.0.
• Y = 255.0.
• Z = 0.0.
• Bend Radius = 12.7.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-9 Enter Breakpoint

12 ❑ Click the ADD button.

13 ❑ Enter the last point.

• X = 0.0.
• Y = 255.0.
• Z = 0.0.
• Bend Radius = 12.7.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 26-10 Enter Breakpoint

14 ❑ Click the ADD button.

15 ❑ Select the NOMINAL radio button.

16 ❑ Click the OK button.

17 ❑ Click the OK button to accept the tube.

231
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Construct Tube Points


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select TUBE > BREAKPOINTS.

• Tube = N_TUBE001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-11

2 ❑ Click OK to the 6 points created dialog.

Measuring a Tube
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

Notice how CAM2 Measure steps through the measurement of a tube by


linking the plane and cylinder commands.

2 ❑ Measure End B of the tube as a plane.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 26-12 Measure Plane

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

232
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface of the cylinder
and press the BACK
button for compensa-
tion.

FIGURE 26-13 Measure First Segment

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

6 ❑ Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface of the cylinder
and press the BACK
button for compensa-
tion.

FIGURE 26-14 Measure Second Segment

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

233
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface of the cylinder
and press the BACK
button for compensa-
tion.

FIGURE 26-15 Measure Third Segment

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder results.

10 ❑ Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface of the cylinder
and press the BACK
button for compensa-
tion.

FIGURE 26-16 Measure Fourth Segment

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

234
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cyl-
inder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move away from the
surface of the cylinder
and press the BACK
button for compensa-
tion.

FIGURE 26-17 Measure Fifth Segment

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a
cylinder.

14 ❑ Press the Back button to tell CAM2 you are finished measuring.

• Press the <BACK> == NO button to


confirm that there are no more seg-
ments to measure.
FIGURE 26-18 Last Segment?

235
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Measure End A of the tube as a plane.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 26-19 Measure Plane

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

17 ❑ The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

• Tube Diameter = 6.35.


• Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-20 Tube Bend Information

18 ❑ Select the NOMINALS tab.

• Select Nominal =
N_TUBE001.

FIGURE 26-21 Tube Results

19 ❑ Press the OK button to accept the tube.

236
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Tube Alignment
1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

• Primary Point = C_TUBE001-BP1.


• Secondary Point = C_TUBE001-BP2.
• Tertiary Point = C_TUBE001-BP6.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 26-22 Feature Alignment

2 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP1.

• Select Nominal =
N_TUBE001-BP1.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-23 Nominal Breakpoint

3 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP2.

• Select Nominal =
N_TUBE001-BP2.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-24 Nominal Breakpoint

237
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP6.

• Select Nominal =
N_TUBE001-BP6.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-25 Nominal Breakpoint

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Printing a Report
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Tube Program.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-26 Enter Header Information

238
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features are On the report will
have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-
umn. To add or remove features from the
report, click the check box to the left of
the feature.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 26-27 Report List

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename = Tube
Program.
• Save as type =
MHTML File
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 26-28 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

239
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

End Learn.
1 ❑ Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button.

FIGURE 26-29 Offline Learn/Execute

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Creator = your name.


• Part Name = Tube Program.
• Drawing Revision Number = A.
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 26-30 Saving the Learn/Execute

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

240
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

241
Chapter 26: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Tool Building Instructors


Comments
• Objective - The instructor will introduce techniques that
may be used to position parts into an assembly. Upon Enter
completion of this section, the student will be able to
position parts using the DRO Window. Comments Here
Tool Building
This section deals with building an assembly with known data. These
techniques are used to find the high or low surface or out of round locations for
a circle, cylinder or sphere.

DRO Window
The DRO window may be assigned to a measured, constructed, or nominal
feature. The DRO window will display the deviation between the probe to the
selected feature. The deviation color is based upon the feature tolerance
(nominal tolerances will be based upon the feature default). A green value is in
tolerance. A yellow value is in tolerance, but above 75% of the tolerance value.
A red value is out of tolerance. The DRO Window on a feature will be
compensated for the probe. The DRO Window command is found in Review
Features. The window may be modified by clicking on the Windows icon and
selecting Configure.

Dynamic DRO Window


The Dynamic DRO Window will automatically switch between point and
surface features. The DRO window may be modified for Points or Surfaces by
clicking on the Windows icon and selecting Configure.

Important Topics - Tool Building


• DRO Windows may be created to show the deviation of the
measurement device to the feature.

• The Dynamic DRO Window may be used on points and surfaces.

• Nominal Features will use the default part tolerance to display the
green (in tolerance), yellow (tolerance warning) or red (out of
tolerance) deviation colors.

243
Chapter 27: Tool Building
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical Instructors


Comments
Practical Exercise
Enter
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.
Comments Here
2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 28-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

FIGURE 28-3 FARO CAD Translator

245
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 28-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 28-4 Adding CAD Parts

246
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in
the screen.

FIGURE 28-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

Aligning to the CAD


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-6 Measure Sphere A

247
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_A.

FIGURE 28-7 Sphere Results

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 28-8 Results Nominal Tab

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= -135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diam-


eter = 12.0.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 28-9 Construct Sphere Enter Values

248
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

7 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-10 Measure Sphere B

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_B.

FIGURE 28-11 Sphere Results

9 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 28-12 Results Nominal Tab

249
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diame-


ter = 12.0.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 28-13 Construct Sphere Enter Values

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

12 ❑ Measure Sphere C.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-14 Measure Sphere C

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_C.

FIGURE 28-15 Sphere Results

250
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 28-16 Results Nominal Tab

15 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= -135.0, Y = 50.0, Z = 28.5, Diame-


ter = 12.00.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 28-17 Construct Sphere Enter Values

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

251
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Iterative Alignment
1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Selected Choices = M_SPHERE_A,


M_SPHERE_B, M_SPHERE_C.
• Set Weights = unchecked.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-18 Iterative Alignment

2 ❑ The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real
time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached
the command will stop. The calculations may not be seen since the
calculation should solve very quickly.

• Take a look at the MAX ERROR of


the Iterative Alignment. For this
part the value should be in toler-
ance.
• Notice the error between each of the
measured spheres and its associated
nominal.

FIGURE 28-19 Iterative Alignment Results

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

252
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

• File name = Tool Building.


• Save as type = CAM2 Measure
(*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 28-20 Save As

Import Model
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename = Bracket3.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 28-21 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

253
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
Bracket3.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 28-22 Adding CAD Parts

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of
the part.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 28-23 Construct Circle

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 28-24 Circle Results

254
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the surface
trim edge. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of
the part.
• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.
FIGURE 28-25 Construct Circle

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE002.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 28-26 Circle Results

7 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

• Select a Line = N_CIRCLE001.


• Distance = 2.6.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-27 Move IJK

NOTE: The DISTANCE value is based upon the location of the center of
255
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

the probe from the center of the circle.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 28-28 Point Results

9 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

• Select a Line = N_CIRCLE002.


• Distance = 2.6.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-29 Move IJK

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT002.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 28-30 Point Results

256
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a DRO window on a Nominal


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Add a DRO window for point 1.

• Click on N_POINT001.
• Click the DRO button.

FIGURE 28-31 Adding a DRO

3 ❑ Add a DRO window for point 2.

• Click on N_POINT002.
• Click the DRO button.

FIGURE 28-32 Adding a DRO

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

5 ❑ Reposition the DRO Windows so both can be seen easily.

FIGURE 28-33 DRO Windows

Positioning the Bracket


1 ❑ Place the bracket on the surface plate so that the back of the plate faces
towards cylinder G.

2 ❑ Insert the two screws, but do not tighten.

257
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Place the probe in the hole of circle 1.

4 ❑ Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 1 DRO are
green.

5 ❑ Tighten the screw closest to circle 1.

6 ❑ Place the probe in the hole of circle 2.

7 ❑ Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 2 DRO are
green.

8 ❑ Verify that point 1 is still green by placing the probe in the hole of
circle 1.

9 ❑ Once both points read green, tighten both screws.

Recording the Tool Position


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < COMP OFF.

2 ❑ Measure Point 1.

• Place the probe in the


hole of circle 1. Press
the FRONT button.
• Press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-34 Measure Point

258
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.

FIGURE 28-35 Point Results

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

5 ❑ Measure Point 2.

• Place the probe in the


hole of circle 2. Press
the FRONT button.
• press the BACK button.

FIGURE 28-36 Measure Point

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT002.

FIGURE 28-37 Point Results

259
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

• Move the probe close to


the part; the nearest sur-
face will turn red.
• Press the FRONT button.
• Pull the probe away from
the surface, press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 28-38 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• The results displayed are


the X,Y, Z, and the 3D
deviation to the surface.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 28-39 Inspect Surface Point Results

10 ❑ Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

260
Chapter 28: Tool Building Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions


• OBJECTIVE: Understand how to apply GD&T (Geometric
Dimensioning and Tolerancing) to CAM2 features. After
completing this section the student will be able to apply
GD&T to part inspection.

Geometric Characteristics and Symbols


FLATNESS

STRAIGHTNESS

CIRCULARITY (ROUNDNESS)

CYLINDRICITY

PERPENDICULARITY

ANGULARITY

PARALLELISM

POSITION

CONCENTRICITY

M MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION (MMC)

S REGARDLESS OF FEATURE SIZE (RFS)

DIAMETRICAL (CYLINDRICAL) TOLERANCE ZONE


Ø
OR FEATURE

8.00 BASIC, OR EXACT, DIMENSION

A DATUM FEATURE SYMBOL

Ø .020 A B C FEATURE CONTROL FRAME

Ø.250 DATUM TARGET


C1

Form Dimensions
Form dimensions are the simplest of the GD&T because the measurement is
compared to 0.0 or perfect geometry. The Datum is the feature itself. CAM2
Measure X creates a form feature that uses the measured data from a plane,
line, circle, or cylinder to calculate the out of tolerance value.

261
Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Orientation Dimensions
Orientation dimensions define the gap or interference created when two
surfaces are put together. These dimensions are only a little more complicated
because they require a feature and a datum. The datum is considered
infinite and the value of the orientation dimension is over the length of the
feature, or an entered value.

Parallelism
Feature
When two parallel planes come together, they are
supposed to mate flush. If they are not parallel, when Datum
they come together, a gap is created. Parallelism is the
gap. Parallelism can be used with any plane or
line reducible feature. Parallelism

Perpendicularity Perpendicularity

Perpendicularity is intended to show the gap created


by the features at a right angle to the datum. Feature

Perpendicularity can be used with any plane or


line reducible feature. Datum

Concentricity
This tells if a line reducible feature is on the same Feature
center-line as the datum. This is intended to see if a
pin and a hole will mate without interference. If the Datum
pin is not concentric to a hole (i.e., the pin is angled
too drastically) then the pin will interfere with the
x 2 = Concentricity
edges of the hole.

True Position Dimensions


True Position is a fairly simple concept. The feature control frame appears to
be complicated, but it’s not. Align to Datums using a coordinate
system with a CAD = PART alignment and check the position.
Associate the proper nominal in the RESULTS dialog box. In the
tolerances tab turn on MMC or RFS depending on which one is indicated.
Change the RFS or MMC tolerance to the value indicated in the control frame.
262
Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Multiple datum schemes require multiple alignments.

RFS (Regardless of Feature Size)


Me
as
This condition of True Position tolerance is the

No
ur
e
on

ed

mina
tolerance specified for the position of a feature

Tol. Z

l
- Regardless of the Feature Size. The size is
generally the diameter of a circle.

Since this is a 2D value, the nominal point is


projected to the measured plane of the circle
before the distance is calculated. The 2D ½ RFS or MMC
distance between the center of the Nominal
Circle to the Measured Circle times two (2) is the RFS and MMC.

MMC (Maximum Material Outer Tolera


nc
e
Condition)
Inner Toler
an
c

e
Another condition of True Position tolerance is Bonus Tol.
the tolerance specified for the position of a Tol. Zone

feature using the Maximum Material


Condition. The positional tolerance changes
according to the measured size of the feature. ACTUAL

For a hole, the diameter at the lower end of the


tolerance band (as small as it should get) is the NOMINAL
value used for MMC calculation. For a pin, the
diameter at the upper end of the tolerance band (as big as it should get) is the
value used for MMC calculation. If the size of the feature is not at the
maximum material condition, the difference between the actual size and the
maximum material condition is added as a bonus to the positional tolerance.

• As the hole gets bigger, the positional tolerance increases. This


means that even if the center of the hole is out of tolerance, a pin
inserted in the hole would have some room to fit.

• As the pin gets smaller, the positional tolerance increases. This


means that even if the center of the pin is out of tolerance, the pin
would fit into the hole.

263
Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

For example:

The MMC tolerance on a hole is 0.50, the nominal diameter is 20.0 ±


0.10. If the hole is at its smallest (Maximum Material Condition), the stated
MMC tolerance applies. The larger the hole, the more tolerance is allowed
until the upper tolerance limit of the hole is reached (Least Material
Condition).

Diameter: 20.0 ± 0.10


MMC Tolerance: 0.50
Feature Size Positional Tolerance
19.90 0.50 This is MMC
19.95 0.55
20.00 0.60
20.05 0.65
20.10 0.70 This is LMC

If MMC is not specified, RFS is implied.

RFS and MMC are set in the TOLERANCE tab for the feature. Access the
TOLERANCE tab of a feature through the RESULTS or REVIEW FEATURES
dialog box.

Important Topics - Advanced Dimensions


• If MMC is not specified on the print, RFS tolerance can be assumed.

• When measuring to true position tolerances, the alignment in CAM2


Measure X must be based on the drawing datums.

• The CAM2 Measure X software stores the tolerance information with


each feature individually. All the control frame information (diameter,
tolerances, true position information, roundness, etc.) is assigned to the
feature.

264
Chapter 29: Advanced Dimensions
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions


Practical
Practical Exercise
Use a drawing and a CAD file for nominal information. Construct nominal
features from the CAD model, construct a nominal coordinate system, measure
alignment features and construct a measured coordinate system, complete an
alignment, measure the remaining features, create advance dimensions, create
and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Check the part following the dimensions on this drawing. Start by locating the
Datum Feature Symbols.

5 4 3 2 1

65 20
[2.56] [.787]

D .50 167 .50 B D


B [6.575]
130
50 [5.118]
[1.969] 50
20 [1.969]
15 65
[.591] 25 [.787] 20
[2.559]
[.984] 15 [.787]
25 15 [.591] 15 20
[.984] [.591] [.591] [.787]

30
50 [1.181]
65
[1.969]
C [2.559] C

265
160 [10.433]
[6.299] B
4X 5
240
[.197]
[9.449]
170
255 [6.693] 300
[10.04] [11.811]

50
[1.969] B 150
.50 C
[5.906]
B B

100
40
[3.94] 50
[1.575]
.50 A [1.969]
C
60 15 25
[2.362] 15 [.591] [.984]
[.591] EQ. SP. ON A .50
15 8X 20 [0.798] +0.25 A
30 -0.10 140 [5.512] BC
[.591]
[1.181] 30 Ø 1.0 M A B C
[1.181]
15°
A THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS A
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE:
IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE
INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL ±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°
AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28
TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING Armed with Quality
SECTION B-B IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND
63
FINSH REQUIRED
INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100
AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY
TITLE
IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF
FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. BASE, DEMO FIXTURE
03FRM049-REV 1
5 4 3 2 1

FIGURE 30-1 FARO Demonstration Part

265
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-2 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 30-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK.

266
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/
Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 30-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 30-5 Adding CAD Parts

267
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the
ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 30-6 FARO_Demo_Part3 CAD file

Constructing Nominals
In this exercise, we will introduce the method for creating a Nominal
Coordinate system. If the imported CAD file contains a coordinate system that
is located off the part, it is usually difficult to create a measured coordinate
system to match it. If that is the case, a nominal coordinate system may be
created on the CAD model using the CAD features. Next, those features of the
part will be measured, and a measured coordinate system will be constructed.
For a proper alignment, the Nominal Coordinate system created will then be
associated to the Constructed Coordinate System using the CAD=PART
alignment command.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure X will


create a plane with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the edge of the
top surface. Watch the
OUTPUT BAR for
instructions.

FIGURE 30-7 Construct XY Plane

268
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Choose the direction of the plane.

• Click the LEFT


mouse button to
switch the vector so
that it points up.
• Click the RIGHT
mouse button to
accept the vector.

FIGURE 30-8 Choose Direction Vector

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 30-9 Nominal Plane Results

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure X will


create a line with 2
points.
• Use the mouse to click a
point on the edge of the
top surface. Watch the
OUTPUT BAR for
instructions.

FIGURE 30-10 Construct X Axis

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to
define the line.

269
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 30-11 Nominal Line Results

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure X will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Left mouse click a point
on the edge of the top
surface. Watch the
OUTPUT BAR for
instructions.

FIGURE 30-12 Construct Circle 9

NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to
define the circle.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE_9.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 30-13 Circle Results

270
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a Nominal Alignment


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM
< 3-2-1.

• Select a Plane = N_PLANE001.


• Direction of Plane = +XY.
• Line Defined Axis = N_LINE001.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = N_CIRCLE_9.
• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 30-14 3-2-1 Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

Measure the Datum Features


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 30-15 Measure XY Plane

271
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_A.
• Datum = A.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 30-16 Plane Results

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 30-17 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

• Take four or five points


on the side of the plate
by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 30-18 Measure X Axis

272
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_B.
• Datum = B.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 30-19 Line Results

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen


label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange
these on-screen labels.

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER.

9 ❑ Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the
cylinder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the cylinder and press
the BACK button.

FIGURE 30-20 Measure Cylinder 9

273
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_C.
• Datum = C.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 30-21 Cylinder Results

Constructing the Measured Alignment


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.


• Select a Line = M_DATUM_C.
• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-22 Construct Point Line/Feature

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM


< 3-2-1.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.


• Direction of Plane = +XY.
• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = C_POINT001.
• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 30-23 3-2-1 Coordinate System

274
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system results.

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
N_COORDSYS001.
• Scale Option = NONE.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 30-24 CAD=Part Alignment

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment results.

FIGURE 30-25 Aligned to CAD

275
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Form Dimensions
With an alignment between the measured features and nominal features
continue with the GD&T form dimensions.

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-26 Flatness

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the flatness.

3 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-27 Straightness

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the straightness.


5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Datum = A.
• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-28 Perpendicularity

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

276
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore
has not been measured; however, it is possible to measure inside a GD&T
command.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Datum = C.
• Select a Feature = Measure as
Cylinder.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 30-29 Concentricity

8 ❑ Measure the cylinder 10.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the
cylinder by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the cylinder and press
the BACK button.

FIGURE 30-30 Measure Cylinder10

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CYLINDER010.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 30-31 Cylinder Results

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the concentricity.

277
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Position Dimensions
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 30-32 Select Plane

3 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 30-33 Measure Circle 1

A nominal circle from the CAD model is automatically associated to the


measured circle because it is near the measured circle.

278
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Click the TOLERANCES tab.

• X = unchecked.
• Y = unchecked.
• Z = unchecked.
• Diameter = checked,
Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower
Tol = -0.10.
• MMC = checked, Upper
Tol = 1.0.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 30-34 Set Tolerances

5 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This updates the circle


tolerances for this file, and all the future circles will have these
tolerance values.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

7 ❑ Measure will continue to measue circles until the command is canceled.

• Continue measuring all


eight circles in the
pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 30-35 Measure Circles 2 -8

Printing and Saving a Text Report


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

279
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Advanced
Dimensioning.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 30-36 Enter Header Information

280
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features that are “On” the report
will have a check mark in the ON/OFF
column. To add or remove features
from the report, click the check box to
the left of the feature.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 30-37 Report List

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename =
Advanced
Dimensioning.
• Save as type =
MHTML File
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 30-38 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

281
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Save The Measurements


9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

10 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Advanced


Dimensioning.
• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X
Document (*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 30-39 Save As

282
Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 31: Introduction to Instructors


Scanning Comments

• Objective - The instructor will present how the scanning


Enter
functions of CAM2 Measure X can be used to obtain Comments Here
geometric and non-geometric curves. After this section, the
student will be able to collect data for use in CAM2 Measure
X and other CAD systems.

What is Scanning?
Scanning data can be saved as points, polylines, or splines. Data will typically
be saved as polylines, which are easier to work with than points or splines.

Scanned data is always uncompensated, which means the data is always taken
at the center of the probe. To compensate for the probe radius, create a surface
and then offset that surface by the radius.

Why Scan?
Scanning is generally useful if the part is not comprised of basic geometric (or
prismatic) features. The general intent behind scanning is to generate curves
that will eventually be used to create surfaces.

Scanning Options
The scanning option used depends upon the shape of the part being measured.
Certain geometric shapes lend themselves to parallel cross sections; others
lend themselves more to radial or normal lock planes.

Parallel Cylindrical Normal


FIGURE 31-1 Scanning Techniques

283
Chapter 31: Introduction to Scanning
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Freehand Scan

Use the Freehand scan to trace a profile. CAM2 Measure X allows you to set
the minimum distance between the points. As the probe passes through
the minimum distance, it grabs the next point.

Lock Planes

The Lock Plane options is used to sort data onto predefined cross sections.
CAM2 Measure X allows Locked Planes that are parallel to a plane, radial
about a specified axis, or normal to a polyline.

• Parallel Lock Planes: Select the plane from which the cross sections
are parallel, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), the distance
between the planes, and the minimum distance between any two points
on one cross section. If the points are closer than the minimum
distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points until the minimum
distance is achieved.

• Radial Lock Planes: Select a line from which the cross section planes
will emanate, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), and the minimum
distance between any two points on one cross section. If the points are
closer than the minimum distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points
until the minimum distance is achieved.

• Normal Lock Planes: Select a polyline. The planes are automatically


generated at the points along the polyline.

Editing Scan data


Editing the scan data is a little different than editing 2D and 3D features. Since
scan data is not a feature, you can not use the EDIT button in the REVIEW
FEATURES command. CAM2 Measure X has specific ADD and REMOVE
POINTS commands for data created with the commands in the SCAN menu.

Use the EDIT < DELETE command to completely remove scan data.

Important Topics - Introduction to Scanning


• To use the Normal Locked Plane command, a polyline must be
selected. The polyline is typically created using the Freehand Scan.

• The Add or Remove Points command works with Polylines. The


commands do not work with data saved as points or splines.

• Use the Edit > Delete command to delete points, polylines or splines.

284
Chapter 31: Introduction to Scanning
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 32: Introduction to


Scanning Practical
Practical Exercise
Using the assembled demo part, align to the part, and practice the scanning
skills. Work in either inches or millimeters.

NOTE: The steps in this practical are written to use Millimeters as the
Drawing Unit. If you wish to complete the practical in Inches, remember to
convert any number that you are typing into a dialog box.

Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of
the plate will be the XY plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis
and origin, respectively.

S1

S2

FIGURE 32-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

285
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-2 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 32-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK.

Measuring and Creating an Alignment


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 32-4 Measure XY Plane

286
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 32-5 Plane Results

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 32-6 Select Plane

6 ❑ Measure the line.

• Take the three or four


points from the S1 end
towards S2 by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK
button.
S2

FIGURE 32-7 Measure Line 1

287
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 32-8 Line Results

8 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

• Take the three or four


points on the S1 edge by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the surface S1
and press the BACK
button.
S2

FIGURE 32-9 Measure Line 2

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE002.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 32-10 Line Results

288
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Now that you have enough features to define a coordinate system, construct a
Line/Line Intersection coordinate system.

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


LINE/LINE.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.
• Select a Line = M_LINE002.
• Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 32-11 Line/Line coordinate system

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part
1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK to create the Alignment.
FIGURE 32-12 CAD=Part Alignment

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

289
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Save the Measurements


3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• The SAVE AS dialog box appears.


• File name = Scanning.
• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X
Document (*.fce).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 32-13 Save As

Scan Measurement Preference


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ Select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

• Type of Scanning =
Start/Pause Scan
With Trigger.
• Maximum Distance =
100000000000.
• Minimum Distance =
2.0.

FIGURE 32-14 Feature Scanning

3 ❑ Click OK.

290
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Freehand Scanning (2D)


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN > FREEHAND.

• Type = 2D Freehand.
• Chordal = unchecked.
• Minimum Distance = 2.0.
• Save As = Open Polylines.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 32-15 Freehand Scan

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001.


This will be the plane to which the points
are projected.
• Offset = 30.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 32-16 Select Plane

NOTE: The offset of 30 mm will create a plane parallel to the YZ plane at


X = 30 mm. This will be at the edge of the curved surface.

3 ❑ Place the probe on the upper part of the surface.

• Press theFRONT button to


begin scanning.
• Move the probe across the
surface contour.
S1
• Press the FRONT button to
pause the scan.
• Press the BACK button to S2
end the scan.

FIGURE 32-17 Measure the freehand scan

291
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

• To keep the scan data, press the FRONT


button.
• To discard the scan data, press the
BACK button.
FIGURE 32-18 Keep Data?

FIGURE 32-19 Freehand Scan

Parallel Lock Planes


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK
PLANES.

• Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in).


• Number of Planes = 100.
• Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in).
• Save As = Open Polylines.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 32-20 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

292
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001.


This will be the plane to which the points
are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 32-21 Select Plane

3 ❑ Scan the surface.

• Press the FRONT button to


begin scanning.
• Move the probe across the
surface contour.
S1
• Press the FRONT button to
pause the scan.
• Press the BACK button to S2
end the scan.

FIGURE 32-22 Parallel Locked Scanning

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

• To keep the scan data, press the FRONT


button.
• To discard the scan data, press the
BACK button.
FIGURE 32-23 Keep Data?

293
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

FIGURE 32-24 Parallel Locked Planes

294
Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 33: Measurement


Automation
• Objective: The instructor will present how to use the Learn/
Execute modes of CAM2 Measure X to increase the
inspection process of repeat part inspection. After
completing this section, the student will be able to create
Learn/Execute programs to automate steps of the
measurement process.

Learn Mode
The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to
automate a measurement process.
The LEARN mode stores measurements, constructions, dimensions,
coordinate systems, measurement instructions, and target points.
The output of text and graphical reports can also be learned. Programs created
in the LEARN mode can be run in EXECUTE mode.

There are two ways to create a Learn file: On-Line (with the measurement
device connected) and Off-Line (with no measurement device connected).

Create Learn files for operators that may not be very familiar with CAM2
Measure X or the part. Adding measurement instructions to the
Learn file allows the operators to read instructions before they measure each
feature.

On-Line Learn
On-Line Learn is like a video camera recording all of the activities. Once a
feature is measured, add measurement instructions, nominals, tolerances, etc.
in the RESULTS dialog box.

295
Chapter 33: Measurement Automation
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Off-Line Learn
Off-Line Learn creates a program by selecting features from the available
menus for storage in the Learn file. A measurement device does not need to be
connected; the only requirement is nominal information.

Off-Line Learn is useful for creating measurement routines when the part is not
available because the part does not need to be measured to make the program.

The Off-Line mode can also be used to edit the programs.

Execute Mode
The EXECUTE mode allows the operator (or end user) to run the
preprogrammed routines created in LEARN mode. If operators are only going
to run EXECUTE mode, they only require minimal training.

Important Topics - Measurement


Automation
• There are two ways to create Learn Files: On-Line or Off-line.

• Every Learn command has a Comment parameter which stores the


measurement instructions for the operator (or end user).

296
Chapter 33: Measurement Automation
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement


Automation Practical
Practical Exercise
Create a part program, on-line, using CAD data for nominals. Use a CAD file
for nominal information, measure alignment features, complete an alignment,
measure the remaining features, construct non-measurable features, add
dimensions, create and save an inspection report, save the Learn file, and run
the Learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 34-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK.

297
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 34-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 34-4 Adding CAD Parts

298
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the
ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

FIGURE 34-5 FARO_Demo_Part4 CAD file

Start Learning
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < LEARN/
EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the
port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File


(*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-6 Choose File type

299
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the


program currently contains.

FIGURE 34-7 Off-Line Programing Dialog

5 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window.
This will begin the On-Line Learn programing.

6 ❑ CAM2 Measure X will switch back to the graphics view. The Learn
toolbar automatically appears on the screen. It has with three
buttons: LEARN VIEW, SAVE LEARN, and STOP ON-LINE
LEARN.

• LEARN VIEW records the current view in the program.

• SAVE LEARN opens the SAVE LEARN dialog box.

• STOP ON-LINE LEARN returns CAM2 Measure X to


the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This allows you to save the
program, make off-line changes, end the Learn Process,
or resume On-Line Learning.
FIGURE 34-8 Learn Toolbar

300
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measure Alignment/Datum Features


Measure 4 circles in the bolt pattern for an Iterative/Best Fit Alignment.
Measure the circles at the 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7)
around the bolt pattern.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure a plane on the top surface of the part.

• Measure the plane on


the top of the plate. Take
four or five points on
the top of the plate by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.
FIGURE 34-9 Measure XY Plane

301
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

• Feature Notes: Use this to enter information about a feature for the
Report.

NOTE: The Learn file will not store this information.


• Measurement
Instructions: Use this to
give instructions, or
comments, to the operator
as the Learn program is
Executed.
• Highlight: This will
highlight the selected
nominal red when the
Learn program is
Executed.
FIGURE 34-10 Plane Results

4 ❑ Enter some measurement instructions for the operator.

FIGURE 34-11 Enter Measurement Instructions for the Operator

302
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Click the HIGHLIGHT button.

• Click the FROM SCREEN button.


• Select the CAD surface that is to be measured.
• Click OK to accept the results of the nominal
surface.
• Right mouse click to return to the Highlight
dialog box.
• Click OK to accept the highlight.
FIGURE 34-12 Highlight the CAD Surface

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 34-13 Select Plane

9 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 34-14 Measure Circle 1

303
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 34-15 Circle Results

11 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Measurement
Instructions: Enter some
text to instruct the operator
to measure Circle 1.

FIGURE 34-16 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 1

304
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

13 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

• Using the left mouse


button select Circle 1 on
the CAD Model.
• Click OK to accept the
nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-17 Circle 1

14 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

• X = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.


• Y = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.
• Z = unchecked.
• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.
• MMC = unchecked.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 34-18 Set Tolerances

15 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

NOTE: Remember that CAM2 Measure X will continue to measure circles


until the command is canceled.

305
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

17 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 34-19 Measure Circle 3

18 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 34-20 Circle Results

19 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Measurement
Instructions: Enter some
text to instruct the operator
to measure Circle 3.

FIGURE 34-21 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 3

306
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

20 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

21 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

• Using the left mouse


button select Circle 3 on
the CAD Model.
• Click OK to accept the
nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-22 Circle 3

22 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

23 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 34-23 Measure Circle 5

24 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 34-24 Circle Results

307
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

25 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Measurement
Instructions: Enter some
text to instruct the operator
to measure Circle 5.

FIGURE 34-25 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 5

26 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

27 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

• Using the left mouse


button select Circle 5 on
the CAD Model.
• Click OK to accept the
nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-26 Circle 5

28 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

29 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 34-27 Measure Circle 7

308
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

30 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 34-28 Circle Results

31 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Measurement
Instructions: Enter some
text to instruct the operator
to measure Circle 7.

FIGURE 34-29 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 7

32 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

33 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

• Using the left mouse


button select Circle 7 on
the CAD Model.
• Click OK to accept the
nominal circle.

FIGURE 34-30 Circle 7

34 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

309
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating an Alignment
1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I,


M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I,
M_CIRCLE007_I.
• Set Weights = unchecked.
• Scale Option = NONE.
• Click OK to create the Alignment.

FIGURE 34-31 Iterative Alignment

2 ❑ Click OK to accept alignment.

Constructions and Dimensions


Construct the Bolt Circle and check it to the CAD Model.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001,


N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005,
N_CIRCLE007.
• Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001.
• Select NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-32 Construct Nominal Circle

310
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.
• Click OK to accept the
circle.

FIGURE 34-33 Circle Results

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed from the CAD circles. This will
be the nominal for the part's Bolt Circle.

NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions


automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding
Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these
feature types.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I,


M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I,
M_CIRCLE007_I.
• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.
• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-34 Construct Best Fit Circle

311
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINAL tab.

• Select Nominal =
N_BOLT_CIRCLE.
• Click OK to accept the
circle.

FIGURE 34-35 Bolt Circle Results

Since this is a construction, in Execute CAM2 Measure X will complete this


command automatically. No measurement instructions are required.

Check the angle of the circles in the pattern. They should be an evenly spaced
90° pattern around the center circle.

5 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I.


• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I.
• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 34-36 Dimension Angle Apex

6 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

7 ❑ Click the KEY-IN button:

• Angle = 90.
• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-37 Dimension Angle Nominal

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the dimension.

312
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Generating a Report
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Online Learn
Execute.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-38 Enter Header Information

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features that are “On” the report
will have a check mark in the ON/OFF
column. To add or remove features from
the report, click the check box to the left
of the feature.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-39 Report List

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in
Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

313
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename =
Online Learn
Execute.
• Save as type =
MHTML Files
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 34-40 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

End Learn.
1 ❑ Click the STOP ON-LINE LEARN button. The LEARN/EXECUTE
window appears and the on-line programming stops.

FIGURE 34-41 Off-Line Learn/Execute

314
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Creator = your name.


• Part Name = Online Learn
Execute.
• Drawing Revision Number = A.
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 34-42 Saving the Learn/Execute

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

Execute Mode
Run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the
port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File


(*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-43 Choose File type

315
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window shows the list of programs.

• Select ONLINE LEARN


EXECUTE.
• Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 34-44 Execute Only

5 ❑ Run through the measurements.

6 ❑ Constructions and Dimensions are executed automatically.

7 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Online Learn
Execute.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0002.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 34-45 Enter Header Information

8 ❑ Repeat Execute?

• Press the BACK button to exit

FIGURE 34-46 Repeat the Program?

316
Chapter 34: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement


Automation Practical
Practical Exercise
Create a part program, off-line, using a drawing for nominals. Measure
alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features,
construct non-measurable features, add dimensions, create and save an
inspection report, save the learn file, and run the learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD


For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 35-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK.

317
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Start Learning
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE <
LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the
port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File


(*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-3 Choose File type

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the


program currently contains.

FIGURE 35-4 Off-Line Programing Dialog

Add Alignment/Datum Features


Construct a coordinate system based upon the datums, then measure the circles
at 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7) around the bolt pattern.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Click on the MEASURE PLANE command (line 8).

318
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Enter some text to instruct


the operator to measure a
plane. NOTE: This is the
same as adding Measurement
Instructions in On-Line learn.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 35-5 Enter a Comment for the Operator

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Feature = 4.
• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-6 Change number of points for the feature

5 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 9). All new


commands are always added above the selected line.

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE > 2D LINE.

7 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-7 Select Plane

8 ❑ Click on the MEASURE LINE 2D command (line 9).

319
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Enter some text to instruct


the operator to measure a
line.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 35-8 Enter a Comment for the Operator

10 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Feature = 4.
• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-9 Change number of points for the feature

11 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 10).

12 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

13 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-10 Select Plane

14 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 10).

320
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Enter some text to instruct


the operator to measure a
circle.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 35-11 Enter a Comment for the Operator

16 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Feature = 4.
• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-12 Change number of points for the feature

17 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the
screen.

• Label = CIRCLE009.

18 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

19 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

321
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

20 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 9.

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 100.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-13 Construct Circle Enter Values

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

22 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

• X= unchecked.
• Y = unchecked.
• Z = unchecked.
• Diameter = checked 0.25,
-0.10.
• MMC = unchecked.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 35-14 Results Tolerance Tab

23 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

24 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

322
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Adding an Alignment
1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 12).

2 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM >


3-2-1.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.


• Direction of Plane = +XY.
• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009.
• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-15 3-2-1 Coordinate System

3 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = NONE.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-16 CAD=Part Alignment

323
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measuring Features
1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 14).

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

3 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-17 Select Plane

4 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 14).

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Enter some text to instruct


the operator to measure the
circle.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 35-18 Enter a Comment for the Operator

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Feature = 4.
• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-19 Change number of points for the feature

324
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the
screen.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

9 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

10 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 1.

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-20 Construct Circle Enter Values

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

325
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

• X= unchecked.
• Y = unchecked.
• Z = unchecked.
• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.
• MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.00.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 35-21 Results Tolerance Tab

13 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

15 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 16).

16 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

17 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-22 Select Plane

18 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 16).

326
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

19 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Enter some text to instruct


the operator to measure the
circle.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 35-23 Enter a Comment for the Operator

20 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Feature = 4.
• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-24 Change number of points for the feature

21 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the
screen.

• Label = CIRCLE003.

22 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

23 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

327
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

24 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 3.

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-25 Construct Circle Enter Values

25 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

26 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 18).

27 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

28 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-26 Select Plane

29 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 18).

328
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

30 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Enter some text to instruct


the operator to measure the
circle.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 35-27 Enter a Comment for the Operator

31 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Feature = 4.
• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-28 Change number of points for the feature

32 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the
screen.

• Label = CIRCLE005.

33 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

34 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

329
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

35 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 5.

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-29 Construct Circle Enter Values

36 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

37 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 20).

38 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

39 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will


be the plane to which the points are
projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-30 Select Plane

40 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 20).

330
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

41 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Enter some text to instruct


the operator to measure the
circle.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 35-31 Enter a Comment for the Operator

42 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Feature = 4.
• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 35-32 Change number of points for the feature

43 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the
screen.

• Label = CIRCLE007.

44 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

45 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

331
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

46 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 7.

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-33 Construct Circle Enter Values

47 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

Adding Constructions and Dimensions


1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 22).

2 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001,


M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE005,
M_CIRCLE007.
• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.
• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-34 Construct Best Fit Circle

3 ❑ Click on the CONSTRUCT CIRCLE BEST FIT command (line 22).

NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions


automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding
Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these
feature types.

332
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the
screen.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

5 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

6 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

7 ❑ Enter the Nominal information for the bolt circle.

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0,


Diameter = 140.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 35-35 Construct Circle Enter Values

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

9 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

• X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.


• Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.
• Z = unchecked.
• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.
• MMC = unchecked.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 35-36 Results Tolerance Tab

333
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

11 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 24).

12 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003.


• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001.
• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 35-37 Dimension Angle Apex

13 ❑ Click on the DIMENSION ANGLE APEX command (line 24).

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

15 ❑ Click the KEY-IN button.

16 ❑ Enter the following value:

• Angle = 90.
• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-38 Dimension Angle Nominal

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the dimension.

Generating a Report
1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 26).

2 ❑ From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > TEXT


REPORT.

334
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header.
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features that are “On” the report
will have a check mark in the ON/OFF
column. To add or remove features
from the report, click the check box to
the left of the feature.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-39 Report List

4 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

5 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename =
Offline
Learn
Execute.
• Save as type =
MHTML Files
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 35-40 Save Report

6 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

335
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

End Learn

FIGURE 35-41 Off-Line Learn/Execute

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Creator = your name.


• Part Name = Offline Learn
Execute.
• Drawing Revision Number = A.
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 35-42 Saving the Learn/Execute

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

336
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Execute Mode
Run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File


(*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-43 Choose File type

• Select OFFLINE LEARN


EXECUTE.
• Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 35-44 Execute Only

4 ❑ Run through the measurements.

5 ❑ Measure a plane on the top surface of the part.

• Take four points on the


top of the plate by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 35-45 Measure XY Plane

337
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Measure line 1.

• Take four points on the


side of the plate by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 35-46 Measure X Axis

7 ❑ Measure circle 9.

• Take four points around


the circle by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 35-47 Measure Circle 9

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the coordinate system


and alignment.

8 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four points around


the circle by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 35-48 Measure Circle 1

338
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four points around


the circle by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 35-49 Measure Circle 3

10 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

• Take four points around


the circle by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 35-50 Measure Circle 5

11 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four points around


the circle by pressing
the FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 35-51 Measure Circle 7

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the bolt circle and


angle dimension.

339
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Offline Learn
Execute.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0002.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-52 Enter Header Information

13 ❑ Repeat Execute?

• Press the BACK button to exit

FIGURE 35-53 Repeat the Program?

340
Chapter 35: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 36: Measurement


Automation
• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will present how to use the
Learn/Execute modes of CAM2 Measure to increase the
inspection process of repeat part inspection. After
completing this section, the student will be able to create
Learn/Execute programs to automate steps of checking a
part.

Learn Mode
The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to
automate a measurement process.
Some of the information stored in a learn command, such as nominals and
tolerances, will be familiar. Commands such as target points, highlighted
features, and comments are only available in Learn/Execute mode. These are
the visual aids to help the operator measure a part.

• Target Points: CAM2 Measure X records the position of the probe


for each digitized point as features are measured. The operator will
see each point to digitize in the CAD view.

• Highlighted Features: Nominal features may be turned a different


color in the CAD view to help the operator determine the correct
feature to measure. All nominals assigned to a measured feature
will be highlighted automatically.

• Comments: The operator receives instructions in a text window


before measuring a feature. This is a good command to use to
explain important details about the part.

Online or Offline?
There are different approaches to creating a measurement routine. Some

341
Chapter 36: Measurement Automation
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

information is easier to create in Online mode, and other information is easier


to create in Offline mode.The table below shows which commands are easier
in Online and Offline mode.

Online Offline
Target Points Comments
Measure Template command Adding Nominals (without CAD)
Auto Nominal Association (with CAD) Setting Tolerances
Setting Views Changing Feature Label Names
Alignments Copy and Pasting groups of
commands
Selecting similar commands for
editing as a group

Execute Mode
The EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run the finished program. If the
operator makes a mistake while measuring and cancels the command, the
Learn/Execute program will prompt the operator with the Fail Mode setting in
the program:

• Re-measure or Re-start (default): This option will re-measure the


last feature, quit, or re-start the program.

• Re-start with Notification: This option will quit or re-start the


program.

• Re-start or Backup: This option allows the operator to back up to


a previous command in the program, quit, or re-start the program.

Display Results
After each measurement or construction, the results are displayed. The Learn
Execute mode of CAM2 Measure has the ability to display the results (On),
never display the results (Off), or only display the results when a feature is out
of tolerance (Only Out of Tolerance). Each Feature in the program has a
DISPLAY OPTIONS parameter.

Important Topics - Measurement

342
Chapter 36: Measurement Automation
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Automation
• Learn files may be created in Online or Offline mode. Offline mode is
used to edit a Learn/Execute file.

• Comments may be used to input user instructions

• There are three fail mode options: Re-measure or Re-start, Re-start


with Notification, and Re-start or Backup.

343
Chapter 36: Measurement Automation
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measurement


Automation Practical
Practical Exercise
5 4 3 2 1

65 20
[2.56] [.787]

D .50 167 .50 B D


B [6.575]
130
50 [5.118]
[1.969] 50
20 [1.969]
15 65
[.591] 25 [.787] 20
[2.559]
[.984] 15 [.787]
25 15 [.591] 15 20
[.984] [.591] [.591] [.787]

30
50 [1.181]
65
[1.969]
C [2.559] C

265
160 [10.433]
[6.299] B
4X 5
240
[.197]
[9.449]
170
255 [6.693] 300
[10.04] [11.811]

50
[1.969] B 150
.50 C
[5.906]
B B

100
40
[3.94] 50
[1.575]
.50 A [1.969]
C
60 15 25
[2.362] 15 [.591] [.984]
[.591] EQ. SP. ON A .50
15 8X 20 [0.798] +0.25 A
30 -0.10 140 [5.512] BC
[.591]
[1.181] 30 Ø 1.0 M A B C
[1.181]
15°
A THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS A
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE:
IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE
INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL ±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°
AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28
TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING Armed with Quality
SECTION B-B IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND
63 FINSH REQUIRED INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100
AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY
TITLE
IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF
FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. BASE, DEMO FIXTURE
03FRM049-REV 1
5 4 3 2 1

Selecting Units and Default Tolerances


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-1 Drawing Units

345
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 37-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/
EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the
portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn


File (*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-3 Choose File type

346
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure is now in OFFLINE mode.

FIGURE 37-4 Offline Learn

5 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button.

Measure the Datum Features


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

2 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 37-5 Measure XY Plane

347
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_A.
• Datum = A.

FIGURE 37-6 Results

4 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

5 ❑ When you see the RESULTS dialog box, there are two buttons that are
availible to you:

• Measurement Instructions: Type instructions that will be seen by


the user when the user executes the file.

• Highlight: Select a feature to be highlighted during execute. For


features that have a nominal, the nominal will be highlighted
automatically.

348
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• Enter some text to instruct


the user to measure a
plane.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 37-7 Enter a Comment for the Operator

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 37-8 Select Plane

9 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

• Take four or five points


on the side of the plate
by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 37-9 Measure X Axis

349
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_B.
• Datum = B.

FIGURE 37-10 Line Results

11 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

• Enter some text to instruct


the user to measure a line.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 37-11 Enter a Comment for the Operator

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the line.

13 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER.

14 ❑ Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cylin-
der by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the cylinder and press
the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-12 Measure Cylinder 9

350
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = DATUM_C.
• Datum = C.

FIGURE 37-13 Cylinder Results

16 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

• Enter some text to instruct


the user to measure a cylin-
der.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 37-14 Enter a Comment for the Operator

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

Constructing the Measured Alignment


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.


• Select a Line = M_DATUM_C.
• Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-15 Construct Point Line/Feature

351
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-


2-1.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.


• Direction of Plane = +XY.
• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = C_POINT001.
• Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle
button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 37-16 3-2-1 Coordinate System

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS001.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
*WORLD*.
• Scale Option = NONE.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 37-17 CAD=Part Alignment

352
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Form Dimensions
An alignment between the measured features and the nominal features has
been completed, continue with the GD&T form dimensions.

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-18 Flatness

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the flatness.

3 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-19 Straightness

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the straightness.

353
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Datum = A.
• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-20 Perpendicularity

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore
has not been measured, however; it is possible to measure inside a GD&T
command.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

• Tolerance = 0.50.
• Datum = C.
• Select a Feature = Measure as Cyl-
inder.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 37-21 Concentricity

8 ❑ Measure the cylinder 10.

• Take nine to twelve


points around the cylin-
der by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Move to the center of
the cylinder and press
the BACK button.

FIGURE 37-22 Measure Cylinder10

354
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CYLINDER010.

FIGURE 37-23 Cylinder Results

10 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

• Enter some text to instruct


the user to measure a cylin-
der.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 37-24 Enter a Comment for the Operator

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the concentricity.

Position Dimensions
After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the following hole location data may be
determined:

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 1 0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm


Circle 3 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm
Circle 5 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm
Circle 7 -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

355
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as


indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 37-25 Select Plane

3 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 37-26 Measure Circle 1

356
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 37-27 Circle Results

5 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Enter some text to instruct


the user to measure a cir-
cle.
• Click OK to accept the
comment.

FIGURE 37-28 Enter a Comment for the Operator

6 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab in the top of the RESULTS box.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 37-29 Results Nominal Tab

357
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter =


20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-30 Construct Circle Enter Values

8 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

• X = unchecked.
• Y = unchecked.
• Z = unchecked.
• Diameter = checked,
Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower
Tol = -0.10.
• MMC = unchecked.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 37-31 Set Tolerances

9 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the


tolerance information for the next circle.

10 ❑ Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured

358
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

and nominal.

FIGURE 37-32 Tabular Results

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Measure will continue to measure circles until the command is canceled.

12 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 37-33 Measure Circle 3

359
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 37-34 Circle Results

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 37-35 Results Nominal Tab

15 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter =


20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-36 Construct Circle Enter Values

360
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

17 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 37-37 Measure Circle 5

18 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 37-38 Circle Results

19 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 37-39 Results Nominal Tab

361
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

20 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter =


20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-40 Construct Circle Enter Values

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

22 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 37-41 Measure Circle 7

23 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 37-42 Circle Results

362
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

24 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Click on the KEY IN


button.

FIGURE 37-43 Results Nominal Tab

25 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter =


20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 37-44 Construct Circle Enter Values

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

363
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Bolt Circle
1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001,


N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005,
N_CIRCLE007.
• Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001.
• Select NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-45 Construct Nominal Circle

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.
• Click OK to accept the
circle.

FIGURE 37-46 Circle Results

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed using the CAD circles. This will
be our nominal for the measured Bolt Circle.

364
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I,


M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I,
M_CIRCLE007_I.
• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-47 Construct Best Fit Circle

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Select Nominal =
N_BOLT_CIRCLE.

FIGURE 37-48 Bolt Circle Results

365
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

• X = checked. Upper Tol


= 0.25, Lower Tol = -
0.25.
• Y = checked. Upper Tol
= 0.25, Lower Tol = -
0.25.
• Z = unchecked.
• Diameter = checked,
Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower
Tol = -0.10.
• MMC = unchecked.
• Form = unchecked.
• RMS = unchecked.
• Std Dev = unchecked.
• RFS = unchecked.
FIGURE 37-49 Set Tolerances

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Position Dimensions
1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

• MMC = 1.0.
• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE001_I.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-50 Position

366
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCE tab.

• MMC = checked, Upper


Tol = 1.0.
• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 37-51 Position Tolerances

3 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will update the


position tolerances for this file and all the future position commands.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

• MMC = 1.0.
• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE003_I.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-52 Position

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

• MMC = 1.0.
• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE005_I.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-53 Position

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

367
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

• MMC = 1.0.
• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE007_I.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-54 Position

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

Printing a Report
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION


dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Base Plate
Training.
• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-55 Enter Header Information

368
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

• Header = Header
• Format = Tabular.
• Picture = checked.
• Notes = unchecked.
• Auto Arrange Labels = checked
• Calibration Error = unchecked.
• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.
• All the features are On the report will
have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-
umn. To add or remove features from
the report, click the check box to the
left of the feature.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 37-56 Report List

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Filename = Base
Plate Train-
ing.
• Save as type =
MHTML File
(*.mht).
• Click the SAVE
button.

FIGURE 37-57 Save Report

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

369
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Modifying and Saving Your Learn file


1 ❑ Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button. This places you back in the
LEARN/EXECUTE window and ends the programming.

FIGURE 37-58 Offline Learn/Execute

2 ❑ Left mouse click on the PRINT GRAPHICAL TEXT command. You


may have to scroll down the window on left side of the screen to see
this command. It should be the thrid from the bottom of the list.

3 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter in the


window on the right side of the screen.

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dia-


log.
• Allow user to change all user fields =
checked.
• Allow user to change all standard fields =
unchecked.
• Allow the operator to modify the serial number = checked.
• Auto Increment Serial number = checked.
• Serial Number template = checked, SN####.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 37-59 Serial Number Template

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on the MODE Parameter in the window on the

370
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

right side of the screen.

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning


dialog.
• Mode = Automatic.

FIGURE 37-60 Save Mode

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the PREVIEW Parameter in the window on


the right side of the screen.

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dia-


log.
• Preview = On.

FIGURE 37-61 Preview

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Creator = Your Name.


• Part Name = Base Plate
Training.
• Drawing Revision Number = A.
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 37-62 Saving the Learn/Execute

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

371
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Execute Mode
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type that you are running.

• Learn/Execute files = CAM2 Measure Learn


File (*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-63 Choose File type

4 ❑ From the LIST window, select Base Plate Training.

FIGURE 37-64 Select the Basic Measurements Program

5 ❑ Click the EXECUTE button.

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

7 ❑ Constructions and dimensions are executed automatically.

372
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ At the end of program, enter the operator and serial number.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.


• Name of the Part = Base Plate
Training.
• Serial Number of the current part =
SN0001.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 37-65 Enter Header Information

9 ❑ Click OK in REPORT PREVIEW.

10 ❑ Repeat Execute?

• Press to exit

FIGURE 37-66 Repeat the Program?

11 ❑ Click NO in SAVE CHANGES.

12 ❑ Click CANCEL in LEARN FILES.

373
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

374
Chapter 37: Measurement Automation Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Creating Digital


Pictures with FARO’s Image
Creator
• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to use digital
pictures and a CAM2 Measure Learn Execute program to
create a SoftCheck Tool. After completing this section the
student will be able to create a SoftCheck Tool.

SoftCheck Tools
SoftCheck Tool is the term for enhanced Learn/Execute programs.

A typical Learn/Execute program takes an operator through the steps of a part


program with instruction text prompts and CAD drawings.

A SoftCheck Tool incorporates digital pictures of the part and color-coded


targets to make the program more user friendly. Digital video (AVI) and
digital audio (WAV) can also be used in a SoftCheck Tool.

Taking Pictures
Take pictures to show an operator exactly where to take the measurements.
Take close-up shots of areas where detail is needed. Orient the camera in the
same way that the operator will be looking at the part.

While taking pictures, include as many features in a shot without sacrificing


space, picture clarity, and quality. Capturing a big cluster of features from
far away will not provide enough detailed information for the operator. One
picture can be used as many times as needed. The ideal image size is 640x480
pixels, most cameras have an adjustable setting for the size of a picture.

One picture of the entire part must be taken to use as an icon in SoftCheck
Tool Manager.

375
Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Image Creator
Each point during the execution of a program will require its own picture and
target point. The picture must have a specific name and location for the
software to properly associate it with its corresponding measurement.

FARO’s Image Creator program makes the photo editing process faster and
easier.

The Green Ball


A standard FARO SoftCheck Tool uses the image of a green sphere as a target.
The color green indicates that the probe must make contact with the surface
and the FRONT button must be pressed. A red sphere indicates where the
BACK button must be pressed.

An image library will automatically load with Image Creator. The target balls
will be dragged from the image library to the digital picture. There is a
complete green ball, red ball, 24 partial balls, and a shadow in the image
library.

3D Effects

The shadow is used to give some depth to the red ball or compensation
point. The shadow demonstrates that the ball is floating above a surface.

Independent Comments
Independent comments in the program can have pictures. The OFFLINE EDIT
mode will prompt for the name of the picture file.

A comment at the beginning of each program to instruct the operator to follow


the green ball and press the correct button will help the operator understand the
concept of the green and red sphere. AVI and WAV files can be used in
comments.

376
Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Hot Keys for Image Creator


Keystroke Function

É Help

D Delete

N Enlarge

- Shrink

C+W Previous Frame

C+X Next Frame

A+W Rotate Counter-Clockwise

A+X Rotate Clockwise

S Select

Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures


• A picture that shows the entire part should be taken for use as the
icon in SoftCheck Tool Manager.

• Take several close up pictures of the part that shows the features
that are to be measured. This will help the operator to understand
which features is to be measured.

• Icons must be created to use the Pack Tool command. The Pack
Tool command is designed to create a single file to transport the
SoftCheck Tool to another computer.

377
Chapter 38: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Digital


Pictures with FARO’s Image
Creator Practical
Practical Exercise
Taking and Importing Images
1 ❑ Use the Digital Camera to take pictures of the part.

2 ❑ From the START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS < FARO < IMAGE
CREATOR.

NOTE: The CAM2 Measure portlock must be enabled for SoftCheck Tools
to use Image Creator.

NOTE: A part program must be created to use Image Creator. Copy the jpg
files to the CAM2 MEASURE\LEARN\(PART NAME)\BASE IMAGES
directory.

3 ❑ Select the BASE PLATE TRAINING.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 39-1 Open file

Image Creator will prompt for the first base image.

4 ❑ Click the IMPORT button.

5 ❑ Navigate to the removable drive that contains the images.

379
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Select the images.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 39-2 Open Images

7 ❑ Select an image.

• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 39-3 Select Image

The first measured feature on your program appears in the Tree View. The
Point Number field is automatically set to Point 1.

FIGURE 39-4 Image Creator

Adding the Green/Red Balls


1 ❑ From the EDIT menu, select MOVE MODE. This allows the green/red
balls to be dragged from the image library to the base image.

2 ❑ Click and drag the green target ball from the image library to the base
image.

380
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Re-size the green ball.

• From the LAYER menu, select ENLARGE. The ENLARGE


command will increase the size of the ball.

• From the LAYER menu, select SHRINK. The SHRINK command


will reduce the size of the ball.

4 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

NOTE: The NEXT button saves the location and size of the ball for the
point. The image will get created with the SAVE JPGS command.

5 ❑ Move the ball to the next target location.

6 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

7 ❑ Repeat for all points.

8 ❑ When you get to the compensation point, the green ball will
automatically turn into the red ball with a shadow.

9 ❑ Click and drag the image into position.

10 ❑ Rotate the image.

• From the EDIT menu, select ROTATE MODE. The ROTATE


command will spin the ball.

• Click and hold the left mouse button on the base image. Scroll left
to right to rotate the ball.

11 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

12 ❑ Repeat this section for all measured features.

13 ❑ Change the base image. From the FRAME menu, select CHANGE
BASE IMAGE.

NOTE: The partial balls are used to give the three-dimensional illusion that
the ball is behind an object. To indicate that a point should be taken inside
or behind a feature, select the partial ball that best fits the situation.

NOTE: You are encouraged to do the pictures in the same order as the
features in the program. This way, you take advantage of the auto
increment feature in Image Creator.

381
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Creating Images, Icons and Reports


To run your programs in the SoftCheck Tool Manager, you need to make a
couple of icons or buttons to start the program. Ideally, you will use one picture
of the part to create these icons.

1 ❑ From the SCT menu, select SAVE JPEGS.

2 ❑ From the SCT menu, select SCTM ICONS.

3 ❑ Click the SET button for the BIG image.

• Select the Base Image.


• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 39-5 SCTM Icons

4 ❑ Click OK.

5 ❑ From the SCT menu, select REPORT IMAGE.

6 ❑ Click the SET button.

• Select the Base Image.


• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 39-6 Report Icons

7 ❑ Click OK.

Saving the Image List


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

This saves the image list as an Image Creator file (*.icp).

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

382
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure


You can also view the pictures without having to run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/


EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools


(*.sct).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 39-7 Choose File type

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Click NO to save changes.


• Select Base Plate Train-
ing.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 39-8 Open SoftCheck Tool

5 ❑ Highlight the MEASURE PLANE command.

383
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PREVIEW COMMENTS.

• PAGE UP and
PAGE DOWN
will cycle through
the program by
command.
• UP ARROW and
DOWN ARROW
will cycle through
the program by
point.
• The text com-
ments can be
edited while pre-
viewing the pic-
tures.
FIGURE 39-9 Preview Comments

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

8 ❑ Click YES to save changes.

9 ❑ If picutres need to be modified, use Image Creator, then return to


CAM2 Measure to preview the comments.

Execute the SoftCheck Tool


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools


(*.sct).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 39-10 Choose File type

4 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

384
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Select the program.

• Select Base Plate Training.


• Click EXECUTE.

FIGURE 39-11 Execute SoftCheck Tool

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

385
Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool


Manager
• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the
capabilities of SoftCheck Tool Manager Program. After
completing this section, the student will be able to set up
Part and Operator preferences and navigate through
SoftCheck Tool Manager.

Using the SoftCheck Tool Manager


The SoftCheck Tool Manager (SCTM) is an HTML-based program that serves
as a Player for SCTs (SoftCheck Tools).

SoftCheck Tool Manager has the look and feel of a web site with large buttons
to navigate through the different options. The SoftCheck Tool Manager can be
installed on the computer by selecting the CUSTOM install from the CAM2
Measure installation CD.

Navigating the SCTM


Main Screen

The Control Station touch screen computer opens to the main SCTM screen.

• Administrator: This area is designated for the person responsible


for managing the Control Station.

• New Operator: New operators are prompted to select their


assigned User ID and enter their personal password twice for
verification to begin working for the first time. Once a password is
entered, the operator can go directly to OPERATOR LOGIN
screen.

• Operator Login: Operators are prompted to select their User ID


and enter the password to begin working.

• Tool List: The large, green ball in the center of the screen takes the
operator straight to the public SCT library.

• Log Off Operator: Logs off the current operator.

• CAM2 Measure: Launch CAM2 Measure.

• System Off: Shuts down the Control Station.

387
Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

NOTE: If there is no administrator account set on the Control Station, all


SCTs are considered public and all areas are available to anyone. An
administrator has the rights to set operator accounts and assign or restrict
their use of SCTs.

Tool List

In the Tool List you have series of picture icons/buttons that represent your
SCTs. The NAMES button changes the large buttons to small buttons and full
program names. To return to the large button screen touch the PICTURES
button.

To start a program touch the picture.

TOOL KITS: The Tool Kits allow the operator to create programs using
simple macros. The macros can be linked together to create a larger
program.

Administrator

PREFERENCES, SHORTCUTS, TOOL MANAGEMENT, OPERATOR


SETUP, DATA MANAGEMENT and BACKUP are found in the
ADMINISTRATOR area.

PREFERENCES: Set default values for System Options, Tool Options and
Operator Options.

• SYSTEM OPTIONS: Change the look of the program by setting


the default screens when the machine is turned on. This also
eliminates the number of different screen options or tool list modes
displayed for an operator.

• PATHS: You can view and modify the system paths for the Control
Station.

SHORTCUTS: In this area are shortcuts to Windows Explorer, Windows


Notepad, CAM2 SPC Graph and the SoftCheck Tool web site.

TOOL MANAGEMENT: Manage the SoftCheck Tools on your Control


Station.

• ADD FOLDER: Adds a folder to the SoftCheck Tool List.

• MOVE TO FOLDER: Moves the selected tool to a different folder.

• DELETE: Removes a SoftCheck Tool or folder from the computer.

388
Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• LOAD TOOL: Adds a SoftCheck Tool from a removable drive


(CD, 1.44 diskette, Microdrive) or browse the drives for a Packed
Tool.

• DOWNLOAD FROM WEB: Link to FARO’s Control Station


website.

• PRINT TOOL LIST: Sends a file to the printer of a list of tools on


the Control Station.

• SAVE TOOL LIST: Saves a file that has a list of tools on the
Control Station.

• TOOL OPTIONS: Set access rights for SCTs by touching the


underlined parameters.

• Archived Status: Current means that the program is available


in the tool list. Archive removes the program form the tool list.
(It can be made current at any time.)

• User ID Required: No makes the tool available to anyone. Yes


requires an operator to be logged in to run the SCT.

• Serial Number Required: No does not prompt the operator to


input a serial number. Yes requires an operator to input a serial
number.

• Auto Serial Number: No does not auto increment serial num-


bers. Yes auto increments serial numbers.

OPERATOR SETUP: Add operators and access their tool privileges.

• OPERATOR NAMES: Add, delete, or modify operators. Assign


user IDs, initalize or modify passwords. The RESET PASSWORD box
allows users to enter their own password the first time they log in to
the system. They will have to log in as new user.

• OPERATOR OPTIONS: Set the Default Tool List Mode for each
operator. (Pictures, Names or System)

• TOOL ACCESS: Assign tools to a registered operator.

DATA MANAGEMENT: View, archive, import, export and delete reports.

389
Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

BACKUP: Backup and recover SoftCheck Tools and Data.

• PATH: Set the location of the backup file.

• BACKUP FREQUENCY: Set the time of day for automatic


backup.

• RESTORE FROM BACKUP: Restores the Control Station from


the Backup file.

Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool Manager


• SoftCheck Tool Manager is the player for SoftCheck Tools.

• SoftCheck Tools that are played through SoftCheck Tool Manager


do not require a portlock.

NOTE: The first time a program is run on a new computer a password must
be entered to authorize the computer to run without a portlock. The
password can be obtained from FARO’s customer service department.

• The report names are controlled by the serial number of the part. To
enter a serial number for a part you must activate the SERIAL
NUMBER REQUIRED or AUTO SERIAL NUMBER option in
the TOOL MANAGEMENT > TOOL OPTIONS page.

• A SoftCheck Tool that does not have an icon will be displayed as a


large green ball in the TOOL LIST.

390
Chapter 40: SoftCheck Tool Manager
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool


Manager Practical
PRACTICAL EXERCISE
Transferring SCTs to a New Computer
To transfer files from the Control Station to another computer, the PACK
TOOL command will be used. This is available in the OFFLINE mode of
LEARN EXECUTE in the TOOL BUILDER menu. The PACK TOOL
command compresses all the files for a SoftCheck Tool into one file.

To transfer files from the programming computer:

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/


EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the
portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools


(*.sct).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 41-1 Choose File type

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Click NO to save changes.


• Select Base Plate Training.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 41-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

391
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PACK TOOL.

6 ❑ Select the Image Files.

• SCT File = checked.


• JPG Images = checked.
• Tool Settings File = unchecked.
• SCT Image Files = Select All.
• SCT Base Image Files = Select
All.
• SPC Graph Files = Select All.
FIGURE 41-3 Pack Tool 1

7 ❑ Click NEXT.

8 ❑ Select the Report Formats and Compression.

• Report Format Files = No.


• Spanning = No.

FIGURE 41-4 Pack Tool 2

9 ❑ Click FINISH.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 41-5 Creating CAB file

NOTE: The Base Plate Training.cab file is created and stored in the
DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS\ALL USERS\APPLICATION
DATA\FARO directory.

10 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

11 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

12 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

392
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

SoftCheck Tool Setup


1 ❑ From START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS > FARO >
SOFTCHECK TOOL MANAGER.

FIGURE 41-6 SoftCheck Tool Manager

2 ❑ Click on the ADMINISTRATOR button.

• Administrator name = Administrator name.

• Password Entry = password.

3 ❑ Click LOGIN.

FIGURE 41-7 Administrator

4 ❑ Click the TOOL MANAGEMENT button.

393
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Click the TOOL OPTIONS button.

6 ❑ Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING SoftCheck tool.

• Archive Status =
Current.
• Operator Required
= Yes.
• Serial Number
Required = No.
• Auto Serial Num-
ber = Yes.

FIGURE 41-8 Tool Options

7 ❑ Click on the AUTO SERIAL NUMBER link to modify the serial


number option for BASE PLATE TRAINING.

• Auto Serial Num-


ber = checked.
• Part Serial Num-
ber = SN####.
• Next Serial Num-
ber = 3.
• Next Part Serial =
blank.

FIGURE 41-9 Auto Serial Number

8 ❑ Click OK.

394
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Click the TOOL LIST button.

FIGURE 41-10 Tool List

10 ❑ Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING button.

11 ❑ Measure the part.

395
Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical


Reporting
• OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results
effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this
section, the student will know how to interpret charts and
set up CAM2 Measure X and CAM2 SPC Graph to work
together.

Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph


CAM2 SPC Graph requires two files to create a report. The first is the
picture or view file, the second is the measurement data.

NOTE: All data is exported to SPC GRAPH\(PART NAME) directory. The


name of the Learn\Execute program is in a folder in the CAM2 SPC Graph
directory.

Using Pictures from a Digital Camera


Digital pictures may be imported into CAM2 SPC Graph as an EMF or BMP.
Most digital cameras store pictures in JPG (JPEG) format. Use an image
editing program to convert the JPGs as EMF or BMP. Store the digital
picture in the SPCGRAPH\(PART NAME) directory.

TIP: Save the picture in the same orientation that the part will be
measured.

Chart Types
RUN CHART - A Run Chart plots the actual values of a measured feature
over time. It tracks long-term trends and patterns to assist in determining
when intervention is needed in a process by revealing unusual patterns in
measurement.

RANGE CHART - A Range Chart calculates a value of a spread of numbers


or data. The range is determined by subtracting the lowest number from the
highest number in the group. The range variations are plotted over time. This
shows the variations of a range of measurements in the process.

397
Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

AVERAGE CHART - An Average Chart calculates the mean (average) of a


group of numbers. The mean values are plotted over time. This shows the
variations of an average of measurements in the process.

CAM2 SPC Graph plots the nominal data, the measurement average, and the
upper and lower control limits, which are automatically calculated based on the
data. The Cp and the Cpk ratio is calculated and displayed on the bottom of the
chart.

GROUP SIZE - The CHART, # IN EACH GROUP field specifies the number of
measurements to merge. Each point on the Average Chart equals the average of
the values in each group. Each group is organized sequentially by date.

Advanced Chart Options


PROCESS CAPABILITY INDICES (Cp & Cpk) - At the bottom of the
Preview window is the Process Capability (Cp) ratio. This compares the actual
variation of the process with the requirements. It measures the precision and
performance of the process, but not necessarily the accuracy. A Cp ratio of less
than one means that the process is not capable of meeting specifications
because the variation is higher than the requirements.

While the Cp measures precision, it only indicates the potential of the process
to meet the requirements. The Cpk ratio, also at the bottom of the PREVIEW
window, measures accuracy and precision. The Cpk ratio takes into
consideration the process variation, and how close it is to nominal. It is
advantageous to refer not only to the Cp, but also to the Cpk ratio.

Every process is subject to classification based on capability and control. The


four general cases that we may use to classify a process are illustrated in the
following charts:
Case 1 Case 2

+Tol +Tol
Average Process Variation
Average Process Variation Nominal
Nominal

-Tol -Tol

Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk>1) Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk<1)
Meeting Requirements = "Acceptable" Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

Case 3 Case 4

+Tol
Average Process Variation
Average +Tol
Nominal Process Variation
Nominal
-Tol
-Tol
Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1)
Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable" Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1)
Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

398
Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• Case 1 represents a desirable scenario because the process is in control,


meaning that it has variation within the established tolerance and the
average measurements meet the required nominal values.

• Case 2 is not desired because even though the process variation is small
keeping it in control, the average measurements are far from nominal,
not meeting the requirements.

• Case 3 may be seen as desirable or not, depending on the customer’s


concerns. Clearly, we see that the process varies more than the
specification, but overall, it meets the average requirements.

• Case 4 is not desired because of excess process variation and deviation


from nominal.

Important Topics - Advanced Graphical


Reporting
• The Cp and Cpk values for a feature will be displayed on the bottom of
the Range, Average and Run chart.

• The # in each group value will change the sample size for Range and
Average charts.

• There must be more than 5 sets of data to create a chart.

399
Chapter 42: Advanced Graphical Reporting
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical


Reporting Practical
• OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results
effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this
section, the student will be able to set up CAM2 Measure X
and CAM2 SPC GRAPH to work together automatically.

PRACTICAL Exercise
Modify the Learn/Execute Program
1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/
EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the
portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn


File (*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-1 Choose File type

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Click NO to save changes.


• Select Base Plate Train-
ing.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 43-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

401
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Left mouse click on REPEAT EXECUTE to highlight the last


command.

6 ❑ From the MISC menu, select EXPORT DATA < EXPORT DATA.

7 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

• Allow user to change all user fields =


unchecked.
• Allow user to change all standard fields =
unchecked.
• Allow the operator to modify the serial num-
ber = unchecked.
• Auto Increment Serial number =
unchecked.
• Serial Number template = unchecked.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 43-3 Auto Increment Serial number

NOTE: Un-checking all the parameters will allow the report to use the same
serial number of the Graphical Text Report.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

Running the Learn Execute Program


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.
2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn


File (*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-4 Choose File type

4 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

402
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Select the program.

• Select Base Plate Training.


• Click EXECUTE.

FIGURE 43-5 Execute SoftCheck Tool

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

7 ❑ After the last measurement, press YES to repeat the part measurement.

FIGURE 43-6 Repeat the Program?

8 ❑ Repeat the program 4 more times.

9 ❑ After the fifth run, click NO in REPEAT EXECUTE.

10 ❑ Click NO in SAVE CHANGES.

11 ❑ Click CANCEL in LEARN FILES.

12 ❑ From the FILE menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > EXPORT


DATA.

• Export Measurement Data = unchecked.


• Export Picture = checked.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 43-7 Export Data

403
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

13 Name the view.

• Part Name = Basic Plate Training.


• View Name = View1.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-8 Save View

Creating a SPC Graph Template


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS < SPC GRAPH
X.

1 ❑ SPC Graph displays the list of parts.

FIGURE 43-9 SPC Graph

404
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ On the left side of the screen is the PARTS LIST window. Double left
mouse click on BASE PLATE TRAINING.

FIGURE 43-10 Training CAD to Part

• The PART window is added on top of the PARTS LIST window and
displays a tree that contains the folders of measurement files and
picture files.

• A Master Template is loaded into the canvas (right screen).

3 ❑ Click on the plus sign (+) next to MASTER TEMPLATES to display all
templates.

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on COLOR TEMPLATE 3.AG2.

NOTE: Color Template 3 is the landscape format with the header at the top
of the page.

405
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the VIEW1.EMF file under the DRAWINGS
list.

FIGURE 43-11 Adding the View

• The picture is now added to the canvas.

• Click and drag the picture around to place it on the canvas.

• Click and drag the corners of the picture to change the size.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the SN0001.mes measurement set under


the MEASURMENTS folder.

• The measurement set expands and shows all the fea-


tures in the measurement file.

FIGURE 43-12 Part List Tree

Adding Run Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

406
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

X Y Z Dia Form MMC


C_FLATNESS001 X
C_PERPENDICULARITY001 X
C_STRAIGHTNESS001 X
C_CONCENTRICITY001 X
M_CIRCLE001 X
M_CIRCLE003 X
M_CIRCLE005 X
M_CIRCLE007 X
C_BOLT_CIRCLE X X X
C_POSITION001 X
C_POSITION003 X
C_POSITION005 X
C_POSITION007 X

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

• Chart Type = Run Chart.


• Feature/Parameter = see Table.
• Click the PREVIEW button to
view the chart.
• Click OK to add the chart to the
template.

FIGURE 43-13 Run Chart

Adding Range Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

407
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

• Chart Type = Range Chart.


• Feature/Parameter = see Table.
• # in Each Group = 2.
• Click the PREVIEW button to
view the chart.
• Click OK to add the chart to the
template.
FIGURE 43-14 Range Chart

Adding Average Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

• Chart Type = Average


Chart.
• Feature/Parameter = see Table.
• # in Each Group = 2.
• Click the PREVIEW button to
view the chart.
• Click OK to add the chart to the
template.
FIGURE 43-15 Average Chart

Align Icons
You may want to experiment with the ALIGN commands in the OBJECT
MENU < ALIGN. These align tables/charts to the table/chart you select last.
For example, if you wanted to align the centers of a series of tables in a vertical
column, you would:

1 ❑ Hold the SHIFT key down and select the tables that should align to the
same horizontal position.

2 ❑ Continue to hold down the SHIFT key and select the table that is at the
correct position.

408
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select ALIGN < ALIGN HORIZONTAL


CENTERS.

Saving the Report

1 ❑ When you are finished arranging the tables and the CAD view on the
canvas, save it as a report.

• From the FILE menu, select


SAVE AS.
• Select PART TEMPLATE.
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 43-16 Saving a Part Template

This is called a Part Template because you may use one part template for many
measurement sessions.

2 ❑ Save the file.

• File name = Page 1.


• Save as type = AG2Doc Files (*.ag2).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 43-17 Save As

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

Adding a Preview to the Program


Return to CAM2 Measure Learn/Execute Offline Programing Dialog Box.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/


EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the

409
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Learn/Execute file = CAM2 Measure Learn


File (*.xln).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-18 Choose File type

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Click NO to save changes.


• Select Base Plate Training.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 43-19 Open SoftCheck Tool

1 ❑ Click on GRAPHICAL TEXT REPORT.

2 ❑ From the EDIT menu, select DELETE.

3 ❑ From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > SAVE SPC
GRAPH REPORT.

• Part Name = Base Plate Training.


• Part Template = Page 1.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 43-20 Adding an SPC Graph report

4 ❑ Name the temporary .jpg file.

• File name = Page 1.


• File of type = (*.jpg).
• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 43-21 Save JPG

NOTE: The .jpg file is a temporary file that CAM2 Measure creates in
order to display the report.
410
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Click on SAVE GRAPHICAL REPORT.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

• Allow user to change all user fields =


unchecked.
• Allow user to change all standard fields =
unchecked.
• Allow the operator to modify the serial num-
ber = unchecked.
• Auto Increment Serial number =
unchecked.
• Serial Number template = unchecked.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 43-22 Auto Increment

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

411
Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Intermediate


Coordinate Systems
• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present feature reducibility
and the differences between the coordinate systems. After
completing this section, the student will be able to create
coordinate systems with fewer constructions.

Feature Reducibility
Fill in the chart below:

Plane Line Point

Arc X X X

Circle X X X

Cylinder X

Cone X X X

Ellipse X X X

Line X

413
Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Plane Line Point


Plane X

Point X

Rectan-
gular Slot
X X X

Round
Slot
X X X

Sphere X

3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems


Each coordinate system levels the plane (XY, YZ or XZ), rotates the axis (X, Y
or Z) and sets the origin. 3-2-1 means that three points define a plane that sets
one axis, two points define a line that locks a second axis, and one point
defines an origin.

There are 2 factors that distinguish the eight different coordinate systems.

1 The selected features (plane, line or point).

2 How the features are used.

414
Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Coordinate Systems
Coordinate Systems using a Plane, Line, and Point in Different
Ways

• The 3-2-1 Coordinate System uses the point as the origin.

Z
Y

FIGURE 44-1 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• The Separate Origin Coordinate System projects the point


to the plane for the origin.

Z
Y

FIGURE 44-2 Separate Origin Coordinate System

• The Perpendicular Intersect Coordinate System projects


the point to the line for the origin.

Z
Y

FIGURE 44-3 Perpendicular Coordinate System

415
Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Coordinate Systems using a Plane and Two Lines

• The Line-Line Intersect Coordinate System creates the


origin from the intersection of the two lines. The first line defines
the direction of the X-axis.

Z
Y

FIGURE 44-4 Line/Line Coordinate System

• The Bore Coordinate System creates the origin from the


intersection of the plane and the second line. Notice that the second
line must intersect the plane at a single point and cannot lie on the
plane.

Z
Y

FIGURE 44-5 Bore Coordinate System

Other Coordinate Systems using Different Features

• The 3 Plane Coordinate System uses the first plane selected as


the XY plane, the second plane intersects the first to create the X-
axis, and the third plane intersects the other two to create the origin.

Z
Y 1

FIGURE 44-6 3 Plane Coordinate System


416
Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• The 3 Point Coordinate System sets the origin at the first point,
the X-axis from the first point to the second, and the XY plane on
the third point.

3
Z
Y

1 X
2
FIGURE 44-7 3 Point Coordinate System

• The MidPoint Coordinate System sets the origin at the


midpoint of the line selected.

Z
Y 2

FIGURE 44-8 Midpoint Coordinate System

Change Coordinate System Discussion


Rotation allows the coordinate system to spin about any axis or line. Use the
right-hand rule to determine which rotation direction is positive. Point the
thumb of your right hand along the positive axis or line direction. The direction
your fingers wrap is the positive direction of rotation.

Translation allows you to move the coordinate system to a specific point in


space, either from a previous coordinate system or to any other relative
feature or along a line.

417
Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Intermediate Alignments


• It is possible to create multiple coordinate systems and switch between
them.

• A 3-2-1 Coordinate System may be constructed using a slot.

• Two circles may be used in place of a line for a coordinate system.

• The Translation function can:

• Move the origin to a specific feature.

• Move the origin to a specific XYZ value.

• Offset the origin a specific XYZ distance from a feature.

418
Chapter 44: Intermediate Coordinate Systems
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate


Coordinate Systems Practical
PRACTICAL Exercise
Start with a new file and load the correct part preferences to work on this
practical.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 45-2 Load Tolerances

4 ❑ Click OK to exit.

NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to
+/-0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to
CAM2 Measure.

419
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD.
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 45-3 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 45-4 Adding CAD Parts

420
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in
the screen.

FIGURE 45-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

Measuring the Alignment Features


Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement
Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD
model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you
though the measurement of the three circles.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select


Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 45-6 Measurement Template

421
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 1 on
the CAD model using
the mouse.

FIGURE 45-7 Circle 1

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1 highlights red.

FIGURE 45-8 Circle 1 Results

4 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 3 on
the CAD model using
the mouse.

FIGURE 45-9 Circle 3

422
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1 and Circle 3 highlights
red.

FIGURE 45-10 Circle 3 Results

6 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 7 on
the CAD model using
the mouse.

FIGURE 45-11 Circle 7

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE007.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1, Circle 3 and Circle 7
highlights red.

FIGURE 45-12 Circle 7 Results

423
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and
return to the Measurment Template.

FIGURE 45-13 Measurement Template

9 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not
been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to define a plane during a 2D
feature command.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-14 Select Plane

Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

11 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 45-15 Measure XY Plane

424
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 45-16 Measure Circle 1

13 ❑ Take a look at the results and click OK to continue.

14 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-17 Select Plane

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 45-18 Measure Circle 3

425
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

16 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-19 Select Plane

17 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 45-20 Measure Circle 7

FIGURE 45-21 Measurement Results

426
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Setting an Iterative Alignment


1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001,


M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007.
• Set Weights = unchecked.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-22 Iterative Alignment

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time
results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command
will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Check the MAX ERROR of the


Iterative Alignment. For this part
the value should be in tolerance.
• Notice the error between each of the
measured circles and its associated
nominal.
• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 45-23 Iterative Alignment Results

3-2-1
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

427
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Measure the plane on top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 45-24 Measure XY Plane

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = BASE_PLANE.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button to
accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-25 Plane Results

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

5 ❑ Measure Sphere C.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the
surface of the sphere
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 45-26 Measure Sphere C

428
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_C.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button to
accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-27 Sphere Results

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. This will


be the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-28 Select Plane

9 ❑ Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the
edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B.

• Take four or five points


on the side of the plate
by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull away from the
surface and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 45-29 Measure X Axis

429
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE_FRONT.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button to
accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-30 Line Results

11 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM


< 3-2-1.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.


• Direction of Plane = +XY.
• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C.
• Select the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-31 3-2-1 Coordinate System

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the 3-2-1 coordinate system is the
centerpoint of the sphere.

Separate Origin
1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <

430
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

SEPARATE ORIGIN.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.
• Origin = M_SPHERE_C.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-32 Separate Origin Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Separate Origin coordinate system is
the center point of the sphere projected to the base plane.

Perpendicular Intersect
1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <
PERPENDICULAR INTERSECT.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.
• Origin = M_SPHERE_C.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-33 Perpendicular Intersect Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the perpendicular intersection coordinate


system is the center point of the sphere projected to the line.

Bore
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

431
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-34 Select Plane

3 ❑ Define the Plane.

• Take four or five points


on the surface of the
plate by pressing the
FRONT button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 45-35 Measure XY Plane

4 ❑ Measure Circle 10.

• Take four to five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the circle and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 45-36 Measure Circle 10

432
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE010_I.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button to
accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
twice to reject. Then re-
measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-37 Cylinder Results

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


BORE.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.
• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST
POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the
FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT
ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.


• Second Point on Line =
M_CIRCLE010_I.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-38 Bore Coordinate System

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Bore coordinate system is at the
intersection of the second line with the plane.

Line-Line
1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <

433
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

LINE-LINE.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.


• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.
• Click on the toggle button next to the
FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to
enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and
SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.
• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.
• Second Point on Line =
M_CIRCLE010_I.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-39 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Line-Line coordinate system is at the
intersection of the two lines projected to the plane.

Midpoint
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the
surface of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-40 Measure Sphere B

434
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_B.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-41 Sphere Results

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


MIDPOINT.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.


• Click on the toggle button next to the LINE
DEFINED X AXIS toggle button to enable
the FIRST POINT ON X AXIS and SECOND
POINT ON X AXIS dropdown.
• First Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_C.
• Second Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_B.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-42 Midpoint Coordinate System

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the X-axis is positive in the direction that the spheres
were selected. The origin is the midpoint of the line projected to the plane.

3 Point
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

435
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Measure Sphere D.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the
surface of the sphere and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 45-43 Measure Sphere D

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_D.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re measure the feature.

FIGURE 45-44 Sphere Results

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3


POINT.

• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C.


• Point on +X = M_SPHERE_B.
• Point on +XY = M_SPHERE_D.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-45 3 Point Coordinate System

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the XY plane is defined by the three points. The X axis
is defined by a line between sphere C and sphere B. The origin is at the

436
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

centerpoint of sphere C.

3 Plane
1 ❑ From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

• Select a Point = M_SPHERE_C.


• Click the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button
to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and
SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.
• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D.
• Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-46 Construct Plane Perpendicular

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE_LEFT.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-47 Plane Results

437
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

• Select a Point = M_SPHERE_B.


• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST
POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the
FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON
LINE dropdown.
• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D.
• Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_B.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-48 Construct Plane Perpendicular

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE_FRONT.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-49 Plane Results

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3


PLANE.

• Select XY Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.


• Select Plane 2 = C_PLANE_FRONT.
• Select Plane 3 = C_PLANE_LEFT.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-50 3 Plane Coordinate System

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

438
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

NOTE: Notice that the intersection of Base plane and Front plane defines
the X-axis and the origin is at the intersection of the three planes.

Set Active Coordinate System


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <
SET ACTIVE.

• Set Active = C_COORDSYS007 (the 3 Point


coordinate system).
• Click OK.

FIGURE 45-51 Set Active Coordinate System

Change Coordinate System


Rotation

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


ROTATION.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS007.


• Line Defined axis =
+Z_C_COORDSYS007.
• by = 20.2 degrees.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-52 Rotate Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the coordinate system was rotated so that the X axis is
oriented parallel to the front of the base.

Translation

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <

439
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

TRANSLATION.

• Select X Origin =
M_SPHERE_C.
• X Offset = -15.0.
• Select Y Origin =
M_SPHERE_B.
• Y Offset = -15.0.
• Select Z Origin =
M_CIRCLE010_I.
• Z Offset = -12.0.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS009.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 45-53 Translate Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L


hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin was translated to the corner of the part using
the X value of Sphere C, the Y value of Sphere B, and the Z value of
Circle 10.

440
Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate


System
• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to establish
coordinate systems when information on the datums are
limited. After completing this section, the student will be
able to use constructions to establish coordinate systems.

Calculated Coordinate System


There will be situations in which the datum information is sufficient to define a
coordinate system (plane, line, and point), but the origin is not located at the
datums. The datums are structured such that using a rotation and translation
technique would be extremely difficult, if not impossible.

In the situation described below, a coordinate system will be established using


the indicated datums. The print also indicates that target locations should be
used to define the datums instead of directly measuring the datum features. The
information from this print will be used to construct datum features from the
specified targets.

A
B
A1 B1 C1 35.35
50 50

135 B

10
A3
A2 B2

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS


THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE:
IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE
INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL ±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°
AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28
TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100
Armed with Quality
63 FINSH REQUIRED
IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY TITLE
IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF
FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

FIGURE 46-1 Print with Datum Targets

441
Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

CAD=Part
This function requires that some type of coordinate system on the part has been
constructed using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current
coordinate system equal to the CAD or Nominal coordinate system (also called
the world coordinate system) and moves all the measured data to the CAD
coordinate system. The measurements are then overlaid onto the CAD or
nominal data.

To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the
coordinate system of the CAD. In many cases, the origin of the coordinate
system will not be on the part, and a translation or rotation will be necessary to
get the coordinate system to the correct location.

Constructions
2 Offset Line

This function constructs a line (typically a coordinate axis) where there is a


known offset. When a part defines a datum with two target location and the
points do not lie on the datum line, the Construct Line, 2 Offset command may
be used to construct the line. This command may also be used as rotate
function by entering the offset values instead of the rotation angle. The offset
direction is always to the right side of the two points.

FIGURE 46-2 2 Point 2 Offset Line

442
Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 Offset Plane
This function constructs a plane (typically a coordinate plane) where there is
more than one offset for the points. When a part defines a datum with three
target locations and the points do not lie on the datum plane, the Construct
Plane, 3 Offset command may be used to construct the plane. The plane is
constructed above or below the selected points. The order that the points are
selected is used to determine the offset direction. Use the right-hand rule to
determine the offset direction.

FIGURE 46-3 3 Point 3 Offset Plane

Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate


Systems
• There are two possible solutions in the three-point, three-offset plane
construction. Use the right hand rule to determine the correct offset
direction.

• The CAD=PART function needs to be performed after the translation.

443
Chapter 46: Advanced Coordinate System
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate


Systems Practical
PRACTICAL EXERCISE
Start with a new file and load the correct part preferences for this practical.

A
B
A1 B1 C1 35.35
50 50

135 B

10
A3
A2 B2

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS


THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE:
IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE
INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL ±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°
AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28
TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100
Armed with Quality
63 FINSH REQUIRED
IS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY TITLE
IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF
FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED. BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

FIGURE 47-1 Print with Datum Targets

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 47-2 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

445
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 47-3 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts
another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part3.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 47-4 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

446
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 47-5 Adding CAD Parts

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in
the screen.

FIGURE 47-6 FARO_Demo_Part3.igs

447
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Nominal Alignments on the CAD


Constructing Nominal Objects

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a plane with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click 3
points on the bottom
surface to define a plane
for Datum A. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.
FIGURE 47-7 Construct XY Plane

2 ❑ Choose the direction of the plane.

• Click the LEFT mouse


button to toggle the
vector so that it points
up.
• Click the RIGHT mouse
button to accept the
vector.

FIGURE 47-8 Choose Direction Vector

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = PLANE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 47-9 Nominal Plane Results

448
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a line with 2
points.
• Use the mouse to click a
point on the bottom sur-
face to define a line for
Datum B. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.

FIGURE 47-10 Construct X Axis

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to
define the line.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 47-11 Nominal Line Results

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will


create a circle with 3
points.
• Use the mouse to click a
point on the bottom sur-
face to define a circle
for Datum C. Watch the
PROMPT BAR for
instructions.
FIGURE 47-12 Construct X Intercept

449
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to
define the circle.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.
• Click OK to accept the
results.

FIGURE 47-13 Nominal Circle Results

Constructing a Nominal Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM > 3-


2-1.

• Select a Plane = N_PLANE001.


• Direction of Plane= +XY.
• Line Defined axis = N_LINE001.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = N_CIRCLE001.
• Select NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 47-14 Nominal Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

NOTE: The coordinate system may not be correct. If the nominal line that
defines the X axis is pointing in the wrong direction, flip the direction of
the nominal line.

Flipping Vectors

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select N_LINE001.

450
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Click the FLIP VECTOR button.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Construct the Plane


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 47-15 Measure Sphere A

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_A.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button but-
ton twice to reject. Then re
measure the results.

FIGURE 47-16 Sphere Results

451
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Measure Sphere D.

• Take four or five points


around the sphere by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 47-17 Measure Sphere D

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SPHERE_D.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re measure the feature.

FIGURE 47-18 Sphere Results

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT.

7 ❑ Measure a surface point on top of the base near the A3 target.

• Take three or four points by pressing the


FRONT button.
• Pull away from the surface and press the
BACK button.

10
A3

FIGURE 47-19 Measure Surface Point

452
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT_A3.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re measure the feature.

FIGURE 47-20 Point Results

Construct the Plane


Construct the XY plane with three offsets using the known Z values on the
table.

Datum Features
X Y Z
M_SURFPT_A3 25.0
M_SPHERE_D 50.0 35.4
M_SPHERE_A -135.0 -50.0 35.4

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < 3 OFFSETS.

• Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A.


• First Point Offset = 35.4.
• Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D.
• Second Point Offset = 35.4.
• Select Third Point = M_SURFPT_A3.
• Third Point Offset = 25.0.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 47-21 Construct Plane 3 Offsets

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange

453
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

The Z value of the labels.

the Demo Part NOTE: There are two solutions to the constructed plane. Depending on the
selection order of the features, the constructed plane will be above or below
"slide-in" the features. Using the right hand rule, selecting a counter clockwise
sphere is direction places the plane on one side, selecting clockwise direction puts it
approximately on the other side.
35.35 mm, the Z Construct the Line
value of the
1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < 2 OFFSETS.
"screw in"
sphere is • Select a Plane = C_PLANE001.
approximately • Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A.
54.50 mm, and • First Point Offset = -50.0.
the Z value of • Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D.
the calibration • Second Point Offset = 50.0.
sphere is
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
approximately
• Click OK.
50.00 mm.
FIGURE 47-22 Construct Line 2 Offsets

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the line. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange


the labels.

NOTE: There are two possible solutions to the 2 Offset line. The offset is
to the right of the line looking from the first selected point to the second
selected point. The location of the line depends on which point is selected
first.

Complete the Coordinate System


1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-

454
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

2-1.

• Select a Plane = C_PLANE001.


• Direction of Plane = +XY.
• Line Defined Axis = C_LINE001.
• Direction of Axis = +X.
• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_A.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 47-23 3-2-1 Coordinate System

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM <


TRANSLATION.

• Select X Origin =
C_COORDSYS001.
• X Offset = 135.0.
• Select Y Origin =
C_COORDSYS001.
• Y Offset = 50.0.
• Select Z Origin =
C_COORDSYS001.
• Z Offset = -35.4.
• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.
• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 47-24 Translate Coordinate System

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

455
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART.

• Measured Coordinate System =


C_COORDSYS002.
• Nominal Coordinate System =
N_COORDSYS001.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 47-25 CAD=Part Alignment

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment. If desired, press the L hotkey to


rearrange the labels.

Verify Alignment
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select INSPECT XYZ.

• Verify that the origin is in the bottom left corner of the base by
moving the probe over the part and watching the computer screen.

• Press the BACK button or the ESC key to end the command.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

3 ❑ Complete the missing data on the table. The initial known values given
to you should be exact.

Datum Features
X Y Z
M_SURFPT_A3 25.0
M_SPHERE_D 50.0 35.4
M_SPHERE_A -135.0 -50.0 35.4

456
Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to


PART Alignments
• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use
nominal and surface data to align a coordinate system.
After completing this section, the student will know how to
use the Feature and Surface Point Alignment.

This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART


alignments. They vary from one another by the features that may be used and
how the error is distributed in the alignment. The part datum structure and the
goal of the measurement session determines the best alignment.

Feature Alignment
Feature alignment uses three point-reducible features to give a more exact
alignment without best-fitting. The measurements are only as good as the
alignment. An alignment with large error will yield poor measurement results.

When the alignment error is high, the measured alignment features do not
match their nominals. The only way to troubleshoot high alignment error is to
create an exact CAD to PART alignment. One of the easiest ways to do that
is by doing a Feature alignment.

A Feature alignment is accomplished by selecting a Primary, Secondary, and


Tertiary feature.

The Feature alignment takes the Primary feature and matches it with its
nominal.
2
3

3
1

457
Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Then it takes the Secondary Feature and rotates it into the line between the
Primary nominal and the Secondary nominal.

2
3

3
1

2
Finally, CAM2 Measure X rotates the Tertiary feature about that same line
until the tertiary feature is in the same plane as the Tertiary nominal.

3
1

2
2

458
Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

The results are as follows:

• The Primary feature has zero deviation.

• The Secondary feature has deviation along the line from primary to
secondary nominals.

• The Tertiary feature has deviation in the plane of all three nominal
features.

Iterative Alignment with Surface Points


The previous training courses introduce the Iterative, or Best Fit alignment.
Those practical exercises use simple point reducible features. CAM2 Measure
X is able to use Surface Points and an associated nominal surface for the
alignment.

When using surfaces to align to a part, at least three surface regions that are
roughly orthogonal to each other must be selected. The 3-2-1 requirement
(plane, line, point) must be satisfied when arranging the surface points.

A minimum of 6 surface points should be taken when measuring a nominal


surface for an alignment.

Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values


When to Use This Technique
• When the print specifies that only some of the values are used for a
particular datum.

• When one of the datums is a round slot that is parallel to a


coordinate axis. That coordinate axis is not used in the calculation.

• When a bore center line is used as a datum and the center line is parallel
to a coordinate axis.

• When a surface that is parallel to a coordinate plane is used as a datum


and no CAD surface is provided.

459
Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• When one of the alignment features has a very High error in one or
two coordinate axis and there is enough information to fully constrain.

Watch Out!
If you don’t specify enough values for each coordinate axis, then the part will
be under constrained. You must shoot for a 3-2-1 situation where:

At least 3 Points use one Axis (For example: X)

At least 2 Points use a second Axis (For example: Y)

At least 1 Point must use the last Axis (Z)

If the alignment is under constrained, then the alignment may flip because
there is more than one solution.

Due to best-fit limitations, at least one point must use all the coordinate axes.

Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part


Alignments
• The number of points selected in an Iterative alignment will have an
impact on the processing time for the alignment.

• The Feature alignment error at each point may be viewed in Review


Features.

• The surface point can fall off the surface causing the alignment error to
grow larger rather than solving.

460
Chapter 48: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to


PART Alignments Practical
This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART
alignments. They vary from one another by how the error is distributed in the
alignment and the features that may be used.

REMEMBER: The alignment used will be determined by the part datum


structure and the goal of the measurement session.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-1 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp


file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-2 Load Tolerances

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

461
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

X Y Z Diameter
Circle 9 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0
Circle 1 0.00 70.0 0.0 20.0
Circle 3 70.0 0.0 0.0 20.0

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

7 ❑ Select CIRCLE from the Add a Nominal drop-down window.

8 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter =


100.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-3 Construct Circle Enter Values

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE009.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 49-4 Circle results

462
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter =


20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-5 Construct Circle Enter Values

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 49-6 Circle results

12 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter =


20.00.
• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.
• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.
• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-7 Construct Circle Enter Values

463
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003.
• Click OK to accept the cir-
cle.

FIGURE 49-8 Circle results

14 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not
been measured a plane; however, CAM2 has an option to DEFINE a plane
during a 2D feature command.

15 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 49-9 Select Plane

16 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 49-10 Measure XY Plane

464
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

17 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-11 Measure Circle 1

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

19 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 49-12 Select Plane

20 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 49-13 Measure XY Plane

465
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

21 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-14 Measure Circle 1

22 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

23 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 49-15 Select Plane

24 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 49-16 Measure XY Plane

466
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

25 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-17 Measure Circle 3

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

27 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

• Primary Point = M_CIRCLE009_I.


• Secondary Point = M_CIRCLE001_I.
• Tertiary Point = M_CIRCLE003_I.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 49-18 Feature Alignment

28 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

29 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

• Select M_CIRCLE009.

• View Style = Tabular.

• Enter the Deviation values for X, Y and Z into the following table.

• Repeat for M_CIRCLE001 and M_CIRCLE003.

Deviation X Deviation Y Deviation Z


M_CIRCLE009_I
M_CIRCLE001_I

467
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Deviation X Deviation Y Deviation Z


M_CIRCLE003_I

NOTE: Circle 9 will have zero deviation, Circle 1 will have deviation along
the Y axis, and Circle 3 will have deviation along the X and Y axis.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment


with Surface Points

FARO Standard Demonstration Part - Shell


ISO View
FIGURE 49-19 FARO Shell

Secure the black plastic shell on top of the plate.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts

468
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename = Shell1.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 49-20 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
Shell1.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-21 Adding CAD Parts

3 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT.

469
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Measure point 1.

• Take three or four


points on the surface by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the 1
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-22 Measure Surface Point

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 49-23 Point Results

7 ❑ Measure point 2.

• Take three or four


points on the surface
by pressing the
FRONT button.
2
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-24 Measure Surface Point

470
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT002.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the
results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then re-measure the fea-
ture.
FIGURE 49-25 Point Results

9 ❑ Measure point 3.

• Take three or four


points on the surface by
pressing the FRONT
button.
3

• Pull away from the sur-


face and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-26 Measure Surface Point

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT003.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the
results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then re-measure the fea-
ture.
FIGURE 49-27 Point Results

471
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Measure point 4.

• Take three or four points


on the surface by press-
ing the FRONT button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the
BACK button.
4

FIGURE 49-28 Measure Surface Point

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT004.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the
results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then re-measure the fea-
ture.
FIGURE 49-29 Point Results

13 ❑ Measure point 5.

• Take three or four


points on the surface by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
5
face and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-30 Measure Surface Point

472
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT005.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the
results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then re-measure the fea-
ture.
FIGURE 49-31 Point Results

15 ❑ Measure point 6.

• Take three or four


points on the surface by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull away from the sur-
face and press the
BACK button. 6

FIGURE 49-32 Measure Surface Point

16 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT006.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then re-measure the fea-
ture.

FIGURE 49-33 Point Results

473
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Using Surfaces as Nominals


1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

3 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT001 through M_SURFPNT003.

4 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button .

• Using the mouse select


the surface on the top
of the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-34 Surface 1

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

6 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT004 through M_SURFPNT005.

7 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button .

• Using the mouse select


the surface on the side
of the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-35 Surface 2

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

9 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT006.

474
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button ,

• Using the mouse select


the surface on the side of
the CAD model.

FIGURE 49-36 Surface 3

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

12 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

13 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Select M_SURFPNT001 through


M_SURFPNT006.
• Set Weights = unchecked.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-37 Iterative Alignment

The alignment calculations stop when the smallest error, between the measured
points and the nominal surfaces is found.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

15 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

• Touch anywhere on the part and press the FRONT button.

• Pull away from the part and press the BACK button.

16 ❑ Take 2 more points on the FARO shell.

NOTE: Surface point alignment is appropriate when aligning to a part with

475
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

less than three, or no point-reducible features that have CAD surfaces.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment


with Not Used Values
In this case, the X value of circle 1, the Y value of circle 3 and 7, and the Z
values of the surface points will be used to construct an alignment.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.


• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-38 Drawing Units

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

• From the PART PREFERENCES, click


LOAD.
• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp
file.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-39 Load Tolerances

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

5 ❑ From the FILE menu, select select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This
starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

FIGURE 49-40 FARO CAD Translator

476
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

• Click ADD
• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.
• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part4.igs.
• Click OPEN.
• Click TRANSLATE.
• Click CLOSE.
FIGURE 49-40 FARO CAD Translator

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data
format on your computer.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data


files (*.fcm).
• Choose Filename =
FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm.
• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 49-41 Adding CAD Parts

7 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in

477
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

the screen.

FIGURE 49-42 FARO_Demo_Part4.igs

Measurement Template
1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select


Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 49-43 Measurement Template

2 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

• Using the mouse click


on Circle 1 of the CAD
model.

FIGURE 49-44 Circle 1

478
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 49-45 Circle 1 Results

4 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

• Using the mouse click


on Circle 3 on the
CAD model.

FIGURE 49-46 Circle 3

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE003.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1 and Circle 3 will be high-
lighted red.

FIGURE 49-47 Circle 3 Results

479
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

• Using the mouse click


on Circle 7 on the
CAD model.

FIGURE 49-48 Circle 7

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE007.
• Click OK to accept. Circle
1, Circle 3 and Circle 7
will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 49-49 Circle 7 Results

8 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and
return to the Measurment Template.

FIGURE 49-50 Measurement Template

9 ❑ Click OK to measure the three circles.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not

480
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

been measured. However; CAM2 has an option to define a plane during a 2D


feature command.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the


plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 49-51 Select Plane

Notice that Circle 1 is highlighted red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

11 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• Take four or five points


on the top of the plate
by pressing the FRONT
button.
• Pull up off the surface
and press the BACK
button.

FIGURE 49-52 Measure XY Plane

12 ❑ Measure circle 1.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-53 Measure Circle 1

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

481
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 49-54 Select Plane

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-55 Measure Circle 3

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

17 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_CIRCLE001. This will be


the plane to which the points are projected.
• Offset = 0.
• Click OK.
FIGURE 49-56 Select Plane

482
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

18 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points


around the circle by
pressing the FRONT
button.
• Move to the center of
the hole and press the
BACK button.

FIGURE 49-57 Measure Circle 7

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Using Surface Points


1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT.

• Take three or four points


on the top surface by
pressing the FRONT but-
ton in a small triangular
pattern.
• Pull off the surface and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-58 Surface Point 1

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT001.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re measure the feature.

FIGURE 49-59 Point Results

483
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Continue measuring surface points.

• Take three or four points


on the top surface by
pressing the FRONT but-
ton in a small triangular
pattern.
• Pull off the surface and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-60 Surface Point 2

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT002.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject. Then
re-measure the point.

FIGURE 49-61 Point Results

5 ❑ Continue measuring surface points.

• Take three or four points


on the top surface by
pressing the FRONT but-
ton in a small triangular
pattern.
• Pull off the surface and
press the BACK button.

FIGURE 49-62 Surface Point 3

484
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT003.
• If everything looks good,
press the FRONT button
button to accept the
results.
• If it doesn’t look good,
press the BACK button
button twice to reject.
Then re measure the fea-
ture.
FIGURE 49-63 Point Results

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

• Select
M_SURFPT001,
M_SURFPT002,
M_SURFPT003.
• Click on the NOM-
INALS tab.
• Click on the FROM
SCREEN but-
ton .

• Using the mouse select the surface on the top of the CAD model. If
desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.
FIGURE 49-64 Review Features

8 ❑ Click the OK button to accept the nominal surface.

9 ❑ Click OK the exit REVIEW FEATURES.

485
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Select the M_CIRCLE001_I,


M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE007_I,
M_SURFPT001, M_SURFPT002, and
M_SURFPT003.
• Set Weights = checked.
• Scale Option = None.
• Click OK.

FIGURE 49-65 Iterative Alignment

11 ❑ In the ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT USED VALUES dialog box, change the


weights of the three circles.

• Left mouse click on the check marks to turn


off the Y and Z values for M_CIRCLE001.
• Left mouse click on the check marks to turn
off the X and Z values for M_CIRCLE003 and
M_CIRCLE007.
• Click OK and wait for the alignment to solve.
FIGURE 49-66 Set Weights

NOTE: The surface points cannot be weighted. The nominal surface


constrains the points to the surface normal to the surface.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the aligment.


NOTE: Neglecting the Z values of the measured circles will only consider
their X and Y location for the Iterative alignment. The surface points lock
the Z values.

486
Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

Answer Key
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mounting
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accepted
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . last
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . referenced
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot keys
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . buttons
12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Command
29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Features
29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Features
30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Plane
31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . surfaces
45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . datum
45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . several
46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMM
46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aligned
46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . established
47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . point reducible
77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurements
93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . same
93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changed
93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . additional
94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disturbed
94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XY
171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YZ
171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XZ
171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . perpendicular
171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Point
172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home in
172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cosine error
191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arcs
191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . circles
191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D lines
191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . slots
243 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deviation
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infinite
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right angle
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interfere

487
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coordinate system
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nominal
262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tolerances
283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polylines
283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset
284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . minimum
284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sort
295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate
295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target points
295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . online
295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offline
295 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurement instructions
341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate
375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . program
375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . quality
375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . icon
376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . location
376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . green
376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . red
376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shadow
387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . player
388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch
397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . first
397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . convert
397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trends
398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time
398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one
398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . precision
414 ..........................................................2
415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1
415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate Origin
415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perpendicular Intersect
416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line-Line Intersect
416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bore
416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Plane
417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Point
417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MidPoint
417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right
417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . relative
441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target
442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line
443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset
457 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exact
459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . orthogonal
459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parallel
459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAD
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High
460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . under constrained
460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flip
460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all

489
Basic Measurement Training Workbook
Version 1.0 - January 2008

490
Contact Information
For Technical Support
World Wide Web site: www.faro.com
E-mail: support@faro.com
Telephone Number: 800.736.2771

For Sales Inquiries


Electronic Product Catalog on www.faro.com
E-mail: info@faro.com
Telephone Number: 800.736.0234, extension 2265

For Training or Technical Services


E-mail: training@faro.com
Telephone Number: 800.736.0234, extension 1111

Potrebbero piacerti anche